Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 2 Number Systems Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 Number Systems

11th Computer Science Guide Number Systems Text Book Questions and Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Part – I

I. Choose The Correct Answer :

Question 1.
Which is a basic electronic circuit which operates on one or more signals?
a) Boolean algebra
b) Gate
c) Fundamental gates
d) Derived gates
Answer:
b) Gate

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 2.
Which gate is called as the logical inverter?
a) AND
b) OR
c) NOT
d) XNOR
Answer:
c) NOT

Question 3.
A + A = ?
a) A
b) O
c) 1
d) A
Answer:
a) A

Question 4.
NOR is a combination of ?
a) NOT(OR)
b) NOT(AND)
c) NOT(NOT)
d) NOT(NOR)
Answer:
a) NOT(OR)

Question 5.
NAND is called as _______ Gate
a) Fundamental Gate
b) Derived Gate
c) Logical Gate
d) Electronic gate
Answer:
b) Derived Gate

Part II

Short Answers:

Question 1.
What is Boolean Algebra?
Answer:
Boolean algebra is a mathematical discipline that is used for designing digital circuits in a digital computer. It describes the relationship between inputs and outputs of a digital circuit.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 2.
Write a short note on NAND Gate.
Answer:
The NAND gate operates an AND gate followed by a NOT gate. It acts in the manner of the logical operation “AND” followed by an inversion. The output is “false” if both inputs are “true” otherwise, the output is “true”. In other words, the output of the NAND gate is 0 if and only if both the inputs are 1, otherwise the output is 1.
The logical symbol of the NAND gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 2
The truth table for NAND gate is

InputOutput
A‘ BC
001
011
101
110

Question 3.
Draw the truth table for the XOR gate.
Answer:
The truth table for XOR gate is

In putOutput
A‘ BC
000
011
101
110

Question 4.
Write the associative laws?
Answer:
A + (B + C) = (A + B) + C
A.(B.C) = (A.B).C

Question 5.
What are derived gates?
Answer:
The logic gates which are derived from the fundamental gates are called derived gates. Ex. NAND, NOR, XOR and XNOR are derived gates.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Part – III

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
Write the truth table of fundamental gates.
Answer:
The fundamental logic gates are AND, OR, and NOT gates.
The truth table for AND Gate is

InputOutput
ABC
000
010
100
111

The truth table for OR gate is

InputOutput
ABC
000
011
101
111

The truth table for NOT gate is

InputOutput
AC
10
01

Question 2.
Write a short note on the XNOR gate.
Answer:
The XNOR (exclusive – NOR) gate is a combination XOR gate followed by an inverter. Its output is “true” if the inputs are the same, and “false” if the inputs are different. In simple words, the output is 1 if the input is the same, otherwise, the output is 0. The logic symbol of the XNOR gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 3
The truth table for XNOR Gate is

InputOutput
ABC
001
010
100
111

Question 3.
Reason out why the NAND and NOR are called universal gates?
Answer:
NAND and NOR gates are called Universal gates because the fundamental logic gates can be realized through them.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 4.
Give the truth table of XOR gate.
Answer:
The truth table for XOR Gate is

InputOutput
ABC
000
011
101
110

Question 5.
Write the De Morgan’s law.
Answer:
De Morgan’s \(\overline{\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{B}}\) = \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\) . \(\overline{\mathrm{B}}\)
(\(\overline{\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{B}}\)) = \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\) + \(\overline{\mathrm{B}}\)

Part IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Explain the fundamental gates with an expression and truth table.
Answer:
A gate is a basic electronic circuit which operates on one or more signals to produce an output signal. There are three fundamental gates namely AND, OR and NOT.

AND Gate
The AND gate can have two or more input signals and produce an output signal. The output is “true” only when both inputs are “true” otherwise, the output is “false”. In other words the output will be 1 if and only if both inputs are 1; otherwise, the output is 0.

The logical symbol of the AND gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 11

The output of the AND gate is C = A . B or C = AB
The truth table for AND Gate is

InputOutput
ABC
000
010
100
111

OR Gate
The OR gate gets its name from its behaviour like the logical inclusive “OR”. The output is “true” if either or both of the inputs are “true”. If both inputs are “false” then the output is “false”. In other words, the output will be 1 if and only if one or both inputs are 1; otherwise, the output is 0.
The logical symbol of the OR gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 12

The OR gate output is C = A OR B. We use the + sign to denote the OR function. Therefore, C = A + B.
The truth table for OR Gate is

InputOutput
ABC
000
011
101
111

NOT Gate
The NOT gate, called a logical inverter, has only one input. It reverses the logical state. In other words the output C is always the complement of the input.
The logical symbol of the NOT gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 13

The boolean function of NOT gate is C = NOT A. In boolean algebra, the overbar stands for NOT operation. Therefore, \(C=\bar{A}\)
The truth table for NOT gate is

InputOutput
AC
10
01

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 2.
How AND and OR can be realized using NAND and NOR gate.
Answer:
NAND and NOR gates are called Universal gates because the fundamental logic gates can be realized through them.
NAND gates can be used to implement the fundamental logic gates NOT, AND, and OR.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 14

NOR gates can also be used to implement NOT, OR and AND gates.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 15

Question 3.
Explain the Derived gates with expression and truth table.
Answer:
The other logic gates like NAND, NOR, XOR, and XNOR are derived gates which are derived from the fundamental gates.

NOR Gate
The NOR gate circuit is an OR gate followed by an inverter. Its output is “true” if both inputs are “false” Otherwise, the output is “false”. In other words, the only way to get ‘1’ as output is to have both inputs ‘O’. Otherwise, the output is 0. The logic circuit of the NOR gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 16

The logic symbol of NOR gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 17

The output of the NOR gate is C = A + B
The truth table for NOR gate is

InputOutput
ABC
001
010
100
110

NAND Gate

The NAND gate operates an AND gate followed by a NOT gate. It acts in the manner of the logical operation “AND” followed by an inversion. The output is “false” if both inputs are “true” otherwise, the output is “true”. In other words, the output of the NAND gate is 0 if and only if both the inputs are 1, otherwise the output is 1. The logic circuit of the NAND gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 18

The logical symbol of NAND gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 19

The output of the NAND gate is \(C=\overline{A . B}\)
The truth table for NAND gate is

InputOutput
ABC
001
011
101
110

XOR Gate
The XOR (exclusive – OR) gate acts in the same way as the logical “either/or.” The output is “true” if either, but not both, of the inputs, are “true”. The output is “false” if both inputs are “false” or if both inputs are “true.” Another way of looking at this circuit is to observe that the output is 1 if the inputs are different, but 0 if the inputs are the same. The logic circuit of the XOR gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 20

The logical symbol of XOR gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 21

The output of the XOR gate is
\(\begin{aligned}
C &=A \oplus B \\
&=\bar{A} \cdot B+A \cdot \bar{B}
\end{aligned}\)

The truth table for XOR gate is

InputOutput
ABC
000
011
101
110

XNOR Gate
The XNOR (exclusive – NOR) gate is a combination XOR gate followed by an inverter. Its output is “true” if the inputs are the same, and “false” if the inputs are different. In simple words, the output is 1 if the input are the same, otherwise the output is 0. The logic circuit of XNOR gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 22

The Logic Symbol is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 23

In boolean algebra, \(\mathrm{A} \odot \mathrm{B}\) or “included dot” stands for the XNOR.
Therefore, C = \(\mathrm{A} \odot \mathrm{B}\)
The truth table for XNOR gate is

InputOutput
ABC
001
010
100
111

11th Computer Science Guide Number Systems Additional Questions and Answers

Part I

I. Choose The Correct Answer :

Question 1.
_______ is used for designing digital circuits in a digital computer.
a) Boolean algebra
b) Calculus
c) Iteration
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Boolean algebra

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 2.
_______describes the relationship between inputs and outputs of a digital circuit.
a) Boolean algebra
b) Calculus
c) Iteration
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Boolean algebra

Question 3.
Who proposed the basic principles of boolean algebra?
a) George Boole
b) Charles Babbage
c) John Napier
d) Lady Ada Lovelace
Answer:
a) George Boole

Question 4.
The sentences which can be determined to be True or False are called _______ .
a) Logical Statement
b) Truth Functions
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Logical Statement

Question 5.
The results of a logical statement True or False are called _______
a) Truth Values
b) Constant
c) True value
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Truth Values

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 6.
The truth values depicted by logical constant as_________ .
a) 1
b) 0
c) 1 and 0
d) None of these
Answer:
c) 1 and 0

Question 7.
The truth value depicted by logical constant 1 means _______
a) False
b) True
c) Either True or False
d) None of these
Answer:
b) True

Question 8.
The truth value depicted by logical constant 0 means _______
a) False
b) True
c) Either True or False
d) None of these
Answer:
a) False

Question 9.
The variable which can store truth values are called _______ variables.
a) Logical
b) Binary valued
c) Boolean
d) A OR B OR C
Answer:
a) Logical

Question 10.
Boolean algebra makes use of _______
a) variables
b) operations
c) Both A AND B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A AND B

Question 11.
The basic logical operation is _______
a) AND
b) OR
c) NOT
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 12.
The basic logical operation AND is symbolically represented by _______.
a) dot (.)
b) plus ( + )
c) over bar / single apostrophe
d) None of these
Answer:
a) dot (.)

Question 13.
The basic logical operation OR is symbolically represented by _______.
a) dot (.)
b) plus ( + )
c) over bar / single apostrophe
d) None of these
Answer:
b) plus ( + )

Question 14.
The basic logical operation NOT is symbolically represented by
a) dot (.)
b) plus ( + )
c) over bar / single apostrophe
d) None of these
Answer:
c) over bar / single apostrophe

Question 15.
_______symbol is called as Logical Operator.
a) dot (.)
b) plus ( + )
c) over bar / single apostrophe
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 16.
A represents all the possible values of logical variables or statements along with all the possible results of a given combination of truth values.
a) Truth table
b) Log table
c) I/O Table
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Truth table

Question 17.
_______boolean operator is similar to multiplication in ordinary algebra.
a) AND
b) OR
c) NOT
d) All the above
Answer:
a) AND

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 18.
The AND operator takes _______inputs.
a) only one
b) only two
c) two or more
d) None of these
Answer:
c) two or more

Question 19.
The _______operator output is true only if all the inputs are true.
a) AND
b) OR
c) NOT
d) All the above
Answer:
a) AND

Question 20.
The OR operator takes _______ inputs.
a) only one
b) only two
c) two or more
d) None of these
Answer:
c) two or more

Question 21.
The _______ operator output is true if at least one input is true.
a) AND
b) OR
c) NOT
d) All the above
Answer:
b) OR

Question 22.
The _______operator has one input and one output
a) AND
b) OR
c) NOT
d) All the above
Answer:
c) NOT

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 23.
The ______operator inverts the input.
a) AND
b) OR
c) NOT
d) All the above
Answer:
c) NOT

Question 24.
Identify the true statements from the following.
a) The NOT operator input is either true or false and the output is always the opposite.
b) Boolean algebra is a mathematical discipline that is used for designing digital circuits.
c) The AND operator will give only one output
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 25.
The_________is the combination of NOT and AND.
a) NOR
b) NAND
c) XNOR
d) Bubbled AND
Answer:
b) NAND

Question 26.
The _________is generated by inverting the output of an OR operator.
a) NOR
b) NAND
c) XNOR
d) Bubbled AND
Answer:
b) NAND

Question 27.
The algebraic expression of the NAND function is:
a) \(Y=\overline{A . B}\)
b) \(Y=\overline{A+B}\)
c) \(Y=\overline{\bar{A} \cdot \bar{B}}\)
d) \(Y=\bar{A} \cdot \bar{B}\)
Answer:
a) \(Y=\overline{A . B}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 28.
The _________ is the combination of NOT and OR.
a) NOR
b) NAND
c) XNOR
d) Bubbled AND
Answer:
a) NOR

Question 29.
The ____________ is generated by inverting the output of an AND operator.
a) NOR
b) NAND
c) XNOR
d) Bubbled AND
Answer:
a) NOR

Question 30.
The algebraic expression of the NOR function is:
a) \(Y=\overline{A . B}\)
b) \(Y=\overline{A+B}\)
c) \(Y=\overline{\bar{A} \cdot \bar{B}}\)
d) \(Y=\bar{A}+\bar{B}\)
Answer:
b) \(Y=\overline{A+B}\)

Question 31.
_________ is a fundamental logic gate.
a) AND
b) NAND
c) NOT
d) Bubbled AND
Answer:
d) Bubbled AND

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 32.
is a derived gate.
a) NOR
b) NAND
c) XNOR
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 33.
is not a derived gate.
a) BUBBLED AND
b) NAND
c) XNOR
d) NOT
Answer:
d) NOT

Question 34.
A . is a basic electronic circuit which operates on one or more signals to produce an output signal.
a) logic gate
c) boolean algebra
c) boolean gate
d) None of these
Answer:
a) logic gate

Question 35.
_________gate is called universal gate.
a) NAND
b) NOR
c) NAND and NOR
d) None of these
Answer:
c) NAND and NOR

Question 36.
The fundamental logic gates can be realized through _________gate.
a) NAND
b) NOR
c) NAND and NOR
d) None of these
Answer:
c) NAND and NOR

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 37.
The _________ gate has only one input.
a) NAND
b) NOR
c) NOT
d) XNOR
Answer:
c) NOT

Question 38.
A bubbled AND gate produces the same output as a _________gate.
a) NAND
b) NOR
c) NOT
d) XNOR
Answer:
b) NOR

Question 39.
We can replace e.v H NOR gate by a _________gate.
a) NAND
b) NOR
c) Bubbled AND
d) Bubbled OR
Answer:
c) Bubbled AND

Question 40.
The output of NOR gate is _________if both inputs are “false”.
a) true
b) false
c) either true or false
d) None of these
Answer:
a) true

Question 41.
The output of the NAND gate is 0 if and only if both the inputs are _________
a) 0
b) 1
c) false
d) None of these
Answer:
b) 1

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 42.
The truth tables of the bubbled OR gate and _________ gates are identical.
a) NAND
b) NOR
c) Bubbled AND
d) XOR
Answer:
a) NAND

Question 43.
We can replace each NAND gate by a _________gate.
a) NAND
b) NOR
c) Bubbled AND
d) Bubbled OR
Answer:
d) Bubbled OR

Question 44.
A+B represents _________ gate
a) XOR
b) NOR
c) NOT
d) XNOR
Answer:
a) XOR

Question 45.
In XOR gate, the output is _________ if the inputs are different.
a) 0
b) 1
c) 1 or 0
d) None of these
Answer:
b) 1

Question 46.
In XOR gate, the output is _________if the inputs are same.
a) 0
b) 1
c) 1 or 0
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 47.
The _________gate is a combination XOR gate followed by an Inverter.
a) XOR
b) NOR
c) NOT
d) XNOR
Answer:
d) XNOR

Question 48.
A ® B represent _________gate.
a) XOR
b) NOR
c) NOT
d) XNOR
Answer:
d) XNOR

Question 49.
Identify the true statement from the following.
a) Using a combination of logic gates, complex operations can be performed.
b) Arrays of logic gates are found in digital integrated circuits.
c) In boolean algebra, © or “included dot” stands for the XNOR.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 50.
AB + \(\overline{\mathbf{A}} \overline{\mathbf{B}}\) is the equation for gate.
a) XOR
b) NOR
c) NOT
d) XNOR
Answer:
d) XNOR

Question 51.
\(\bar{A} B+A B\) is the equation for _________gate.
a) XOR
b) NOR
c) NOT
d) XNOR
Answer:
a) XOR

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 52.
The logical symbol of XOR gate is _________.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 1
Answer:
a

Part II

Short Answers:

Question 1.
What are the logical operations?
Answer:
The basic logical operations are AND, OR, and NOT, which are symbolically represented by a dot ( . ), plus ( + ), and over bar / single apostrophe respectively. These symbols are also called “Logical Operators”.

Question 2.
What is Truth Table?
Answer:
A truth table represents all the possible values of logical variables or statements along with all the possible results of a given combination of truth values.

Question 3.
Write a note on NOT operator.
Answer:
The NOT operator has one input and one output. The input is either true or false, and the output is always the opposite, that is, the NOT operator inverts the input.
The truth table for a NOT operator where A is the input variable and Y is the output is shown below:

AY
01
10

The NOT operator is represented algebraically by the Boolean expression: Y = A.
The truth table for NAND gate is \(\mathbf{Y}=\overline{\mathbf{A}}\)

Question 4.
What are the universal gates? Why it is called so?
Answer:
NAND and NOR gates are called Universal gates because the fundamental logic gates can be realized through them.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 5.
What is logic gate? What are the fundamental logic gates?
Answer:
A gate is a basic electronic circuit which operates on one or more signals to produce an output signal.
There are three fundamental gates namely AND, OR, and NOT.

Question 6.
Write the commutative theorem of boolean algebra.
Answer:
i) A + B = B + A
ii) A . B = B . A.

Question 7.
Write the associative theorem of boolean algebra.
Answer:
i) A + (B + C) = (A + B) + C
ii) A . (B . C) = (A . B) . C.

Question 8.
Write the distributive theorem of boolean algebra.
Answer:
i) A . (B + C) = A . B + A . C
ii) A + (B . C) = (A + B) . (A + C).

Question 9.
Write the absorption theorem of Boolean algebra.
Answer:
i) A + (A . B) = A
ii) A . (A + B) = A.

Question 10.
Write the 3rd distributive theorem of Boolean algebra.
Answer:
A + A 1 B = A + B

Question 11.
Write the De Morgan’s theorems of Boolean algebra.
\(i) \overline{\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{B}}=\overline{\mathrm{A}} \cdot \overline{\mathrm{B}}
ii) \overline{\mathrm{A} \cdot \mathrm{B}}=\overline{\mathrm{A}}+\overline{\mathrm{B}}\)

Question 12.
Write the Null element theorem of Boolean algebra.
Answer:
i) A + 1 = 1
ii) A . 0 = 0

Question 13.
Write the Identity theorem of Boolean algebra.
Answer:
i) A + 0 = A
ii) A . 1 = A

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 14.
Write the complement theorem of Boolean algebra.
Answer:
i) A + A = 1
ii) A . A = 0.

Part – III

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
Write note on AND operator.
Answer:
The AND operator is defined in Boolean algebra by the use of the dot (.) operator. It is similar to multiplication in ordinary algebra. The AND operator combines two or more input variables so that the output is true only if all the inputs are true. The truth table for a 2-input AND operator is shown as follows:

ABY
000
010
.100
111

The above 2-input AND operation is expressed as:
Y = A . B.

Question 2.
Write note on OR operator.
Answer:
The plus sign is used to indicate the OR operator. The OR operator combines two or more input variables so that the output is true if at least one input is true. The truth table for a 2-input OR operator is shown as follows:

ABy
000
011
101
111

The above 2-input OR operation is expressed as Y = A + B.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 3.
Write a note on the NAND operator.
Answer:
The NAND is the combination of NOT and AND. The NAND is generated by inverting the output of an AND operator. The algebraic, expression of the NAND function is: Y = \(\overline{\mathrm{A}, \mathrm{B}}\)
The NAND function truth table is shown below:

ABy
001
011
101
110

A NAND B = NOT (A AND B).

Question 4.
Write a note on the NOR operator.
Answer:
The NOR is the combination of NOT and OR. The NOR is generated by inverting the output of an OR operator. The algebraic expression of the NOR function is: Y = \(\overline{A+B}\)
The NOR function truth table is shown below:

ABy
001
010
100
110

A NOR B = NOT (A OR B).

Question 5.
Explain AND gate with its symbols and truth table.
Answer:
The AND gate can have two or more input signals and produce an output signal. The output is “true” only when both inputs are “true” otherwise, the output is “false”. In other words, the output will be 1 if and only if both inputs are 1; otherwise, the output is 0.

The output of the AND gate is represented by a variable say C, where A and B are two and if input boolean variables. In boolean algebra, a variable can take either of the values ‘0’ or ‘1’. The logical symbol of the AND gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 4

One way to symbolize the action of an AND gate is by writing the boolean function.
C = A AND B

In Boolean algebra, the multiplication sign stands for the AND operation. Therefore, the output of the AND gate is
C = A . B or simply C = AB

The truth table for AND Gate is

InputOutput
ABC
000
010
100
111

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 6.
Explain OR gate with its symbols and truth table.
Answer:
The OR gate gets its name from its behaviour like the logical inclusive “OR”. The output is “true” if either or both of the inputs are “true”. If both inputs are “false” then the output is “false”. In other words, the output will be 1 if and only if one or both inputs are 1; otherwise, the output is 0. The logical symbol of the OR gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 5
The OR gate output is C = A OR B
We use the + sign to denote the OR function.
Therefore, C = A + B
The truth table for OR gate is 

Input

Output

ABC
000
011
101
111

The boolean function of NOT gate is C = NOT A In boolean algebra, the overbar stands for NOT operation. Therefore, \(C=\bar{A}\)

Question 7.
Explain NOT gate with its symbols and truth table.
Answer:
The NOT gate, called a logical inverter, has only one input. It reverses the logical state. In other words, the output C is always the complement of the input. The logical symbol of the NOT gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 6

The boolean function of NOT gate is C = NOT A
In boolean algebra, the overbar stands for NOT operation. Therefore, \(C=\bar{A}\)

The truth table for NOT gate is

InputOutput
AC
10
01

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 8.
Explain NOR gate with its symbols and truth table.
Answer:
The NOR gate circuit is an OR gate followed by an inverter. Its output is “true” if both inputs are “false” Otherwise, the output is “false”. In other words, the only way to get ‘1’ as output is to have both inputs ‘O’. Otherwise, the output is 0. The logic circuit of the NOR gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 7

The Logic Symbol of NOR Gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 8

The output of NOR gate is \(C=\overline{A+B}\)
The truth table for NOR gate is

InputOutput
A‘ BC
001
010
100
110

Question 9.
Explain Bubbled AND gate with its symbols and truth table.
Answer:
The Logic Circuit of Bubbled AND Gate
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 9
In the above circuit, inverters on the input lines of the AND gate gives the output as C = A.B.
The Logic symbol of Bubbled AND Gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 10

The truth table of Bubbled AND Gate is

InputOutput
ABC
001
010
100
110

Part IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Explain Bubbled OR gate with its symbols and truth table.
Answer:
The logic circuit of bubbled OR gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 24
The output of this circuit can be written as \(C=\bar{A}+\bar{B}\)
The Logic symbol of Bubbled OR Gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 25
The truth table for the bubbled OR is

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 2.
Explain the XOR gate with its symbols and truth table.
Answer:
The XOR (exclusive – OR) gate acts in the same way as the logical “either/or.” The output is “true” if either, but not both, of the inputs, are “true”. The output is “false” if both inputs are “false” or if both inputs are “true.”
Another way of looking at this circuit is to observe that the output is 1 if the inputs are different, but 0 if the inputs are the same.
The Logic circuit of XOR Gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 26
The output of the XOR gate is
\(C=A \oplus B=\bar{A} B+A B\)
The Logic symbol of XOR Gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 27

The truth table for XOR gate is

InputOutput
A‘ BC
001
010
100
110

Question 3.
Explain the XNOR gate with its symbols and truth table.
Answer:
The XNOR (exclusive – NOR) gate is a combination XOR gate followed by an inverter. Its output is
true” if the inputs are the same, and “false” if the inputs are different. In simple words, the output is 1 if the input are the same, otherwise, the output is 0.
The logic circuit of the XNOR gate is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 28
The output of the XNOR is NOT of XOR
\(C=(A \oplus B)^{\prime}=A B+\bar{A} \bar{B}\)
In boolean algebra, 0 or “included dot” stands for
the XNOR.
Therefore, C = \(\mathrm{A} \odot \mathrm{B}\)
The logical symbol is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 29
The truth table for the XNOR gate is

InputOutput
A‘ BC
001
010
100
111

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 4.
Write all the theorems of boolean algebra.
Answer:
Theorems of boolean algebra.
Identity
A + 0 = A
A • 1 = A

Complement
\(\begin{array}{l}
A+\bar{A}=1 \\
A \cdot \bar{A}=0
\end{array}\)

Commutative
A + B = B + A
A . B = B . A

Associative
A + (B + C) = (A + B) + C
A . (B . C) = (A; B) . C

Distributive
A-(B + C) = A- B + A- C
A + (B . C) = (A + B) . (A + C)

Null Element
A + 1 = 1
A . 0 = 0

Involution
\((\overline{\bar{A}})=A\)

Indempotence
A + A = A
A . A = A

Absorption
A + (A . B) = A
A . (A + B) = A

3rd Distributive
A + A.B = A + B

De Morgan’s
\(\begin{aligned}
\overline{A+B} &=\bar{A} \cdot \bar{B} \\
\overline{A . B} &=\bar{A}+\bar{B}
\end{aligned}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 5.
List all the logic gates with their symbols and truth tables.
Answer:
Logic Gates and their corresponding Truth Tables
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 30 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems II 31

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Pdf Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

11th Chemistry Guide Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Textual Questions:

I. Choose the best Answer:

Question 1.
Electronic configuration of species M2+ is 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d6 and its atomic weight is 56. The number of neutrons in the nucleus of species M is
(a) 26
(b) 22
(c) 30
(d) 24
Answer:
(c) 30

Question 2.
The energy of light of wavelength 45nm is
(a) 6.65 × 1015 J
(b) 6.67 × 1011 J
(c) 4.42 × 10-18 J
(d) 4.42 × 10-5 V
Answer:
(c) 4.42 × 10-18 J

Question 3.
The energies E1 and E2 of two radiation are 25 eV and 50 eV respectively. The radiation between their wavelengths ie., λ1 and λ2 will be
(a) \(\frac{\lambda_{1}}{\lambda_{2}}\) = 1
(b) λ1 = 2 λ2
(c) λ1 = \(\sqrt{225 \times 50}\) λ2
(d) 2λ1 = λ2
Answer:
(b) λ1 = 2 λ2

Question 4.
Splitting of spectral lines in an electric field is called
(a) Zeeman effect
(b) shielding effect
(c) Compton effect
(d) stark effect
Answer:
(d) stark effect

Question 5.
Based on equation E = -2.178 × 10-18 J(z2/n2), certain conclusions are written. Which of them is not correct?
(a) Equation can be used to calculate the change in energy when the electron changes orbit
(b) For n – 1 , the electron has a more negative energy then it does for n = 6 which means that the eiectron is more loosely bound in the smallest allowed orbit
(c) The negative sign in equation simply means that the energy of electron bound to the nucleus is lower than it would be if the electrons were at the infinite distance ffome nucleus.
(d) Larger the value of n, the larger is the orbit radius.
Answer:
(b) For n – 1 , the electron has a more negative energy then it does for n = 6 which means that the eiectron is more loosely bound in the smallest allowed orbit.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 6.
According to the Bohr Theory , which of the following transitions in the hydrogen atom will give rise to least energetic photon?
(a) n = 6 to n = 1
(b) n = 5 to n = 4
(c) n = 5 to n = 3
(d) n = 6 to n = 5
Answer:
(d) n = 6 to n = 5

Question 7.
Assertion:
The spectrum of He+ is expected to be similar to that of hydrogen
Reason: He+ is also one electron system.
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.
(b) If both assertion and reason are true but reasons is not the correct explanation of assertion.
(c) If assertion is true but reason is false
(d) If both assertion and reason are false
Answer:
(a) If both assertion and reason are true and reason is the correct explanation of assertion.

Question 8.
Which of the following pairs of d-orbitals will have electron density along the axes?
(a) dz2, dxz
(b) dxz, dyz
(c) dx2, dx2 – y2
(d) dxy, dx2 – y2
Answer:
(c) dx2, dx2 – y2

Question 9.
Two electron occupying the same orbital are distinguished by
(a) Azimuthal quantum number
(b) Spin quantum number
(c) Magnetic quantum number
(d) Orbital quantum number
Answer:
(b) Spin quantum number

Question 10.
The electronic configuration of Eu (Atomic no, 63), Gd (Atomic no . 64), and Tb (Atomic no. 65) are
(a) [Xe] 4f6 5d1 6s2, [Xe] 4f7 5d1 6s2 and [Xe] 4f8 5d1 6s2
(b) [Xe] 4f7 6s2, [Xe] 4f1 5d1 6s2 and [Xe] 4f9 6s2
(c) [Xe] 4f7 6s2, [Xe] 4f8 6s2 and [Xe] 4f8 5d1 6s2
(d) [Xe] 4f6 5d1 6s2, [Xe] 4f1 5d1 6s2 and [Xe] 4f9 6s2
Answer:
(b) [Xe] 4f7 6s2, [Xe] 4f1 5d1 6s2 and [Xe] 4f9 6s2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 11.
The maximum number of electrons in a sub shell is given by the expression
(a) 2n2
(b) 2l + 1
(c) 4l + 2
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) 4l + 2

Question 12.
For d-electrons, the orbit angular momentum is
(a) \(\frac{\sqrt{2} h}{2 \pi}\)

(b) \(\frac{\sqrt{2 h}}{2 \pi}\)

(c) \(\frac{\sqrt{2 \times 4} \mathrm{~h}}{2 \pi}\)

(d) \(\frac{\sqrt{6} \mathrm{~h}}{2 \pi}\)
Answer:
(d) \(\frac{\sqrt{6} \mathrm{~h}}{2 \pi}\)

Question 13.
What is the maximum number electrons that car be associated with following set of quantum numbers? n = 3, l = 1 and m = -1
(a) 4
(b) 6
(c) 2
(d) 10
Answer:
(c) 2

Question 14.
Assertion:
The number of radials and angular nodes for 3p orbital are I, 1 respectively.
Reason:
The number of radials and angular nodes depends only one the quantum number.
(a) Both assertion and reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the assertion
(b) Both assertion and reason are true but the reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion
(c) Assertion is true but the reason is false
(d) Both assertion and reason are false
Answer:
(c) Assertion is true but the reason is false

Question 15.
The total number of orbitals associated with the principal quantum number n = 3 is
(a) 9
(b) 8
(c) 5
(d) 7
Answer:
(a) 9

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 16.
If n = 6, the sequence for filling electrons will be,
(a) ns → (n – 2)f → (n – 1)d → np
(b) ns → (n – 1 )d → (n – 2)f → np
(c) ns → {n – 2)f → np → (n – 1 )d
(d) none of these are correct
Answer:
(a) ns → (n – 2)f → (n – 1)d → np

Question 17.
Consider the following sets of quantum numbers:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 1
Which of the following sets of quantum numbers is not possible?
(a) (i), (ii) and (iv)
(b) (ii), (iv) and (v)
(c) (i) and (iii)
(d) (ii), (iii) and (iv)
Answer:
(b) (ii), (iv) and (v)

Question 18.
How many electrons in an atom with atomic number 105 can have (n + l) = 8?
(a) 30
(b) 17
(c) 15
(d) unpredictable
Answer:
(b) 17

Question 19.
Electron density in the yz plane of 3dx2 – y2 orbital is
(a) zero
(b) 0.50
(c) 0.75
(d) 0.90
Answer:
(a) zero

Question 20.
If uncertainty in position and momentum are equal, then minimum uncertainty in velocity is
(a) \(\frac{1}{m} \sqrt{\frac{h}{\pi}}\)

(b) \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\pi}}\)

(c) \(\frac{1}{2 m} \sqrt{\frac{h}{\pi}}\)

(d) \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{4 \pi}\)
Answer:
(c) \(\frac{1}{2 m} \sqrt{\frac{h}{\pi}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 21.
A macroscopic particle of mass 100 g and moving at a velocity of 100 cm s-1 will have a de Broglie wavelength of
(a) 6.6 × 10-29 cm
(b) 6.6 × 10-30 cm
(c) 6.6 × 10-31 cm
(d) 6.6 × 10-32 cm
Answer:
(c) 6.6 × 10-31 cm

Question 22.
The ratio of de Brogue wavelengths of a deuterium atom to that of an α – particle, when the velocity of the former is five times greater than that of later, is
(a) 4
(b) 0.2
(c) 2.5
(d) 0.4
Answer:
(d) 0.4

Question 23.
The energy of an electron in the 3rd orbit of a hydrogen atom is -E. The energy of an electron in the first orbit will be
(a)-3E
(b) -E/3
(c) -E/9
(d) -9E
Answer:
(d) -9E

Question 24.
Time independent Schnodinger wave equation is
(a) Hψ = Eψ
(b) ∆2ψ + 8π2m(E + V)ψ
(c) \(\frac{\partial^{2} \psi}{\partial x^{2}}+\frac{\partial^{2} \psi}{\partial y^{2}}+\frac{\partial^{2} \psi}{\partial z^{2}}+\frac{2 m}{h^{2}}(\mathrm{E}-\mathrm{V}) \psi=0\)
(d) all of these
Answer:
(a) Hψ = Eψ

Question 25.
Which of the following does not represent the mathematical expression for the Heisenberg uncertainty principle?
(a) ∆x . ∆p ≥ \(\frac{h}{4}\)
(b) ∆x . ∆v ≥ \(\frac{h}{4 \pi m}\)
(c) ∆E . ∆t ≥ \(\frac{h}{4 \pi}\)
(d) ∆E . ∆x ≥ \(\frac{h}{4 \pi}\)
Answer:
(d) ∆E . ∆x ≥ \(\frac{h}{4 \pi}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

II. Write brief answers to the following questions:

Question 26.
Which quantum number reveals information about the shape, energy, orientation, and size of orbitals?
Answer:
Magnetic quantum numbers reveal information about the shape, energy, orientation, and size of orbitals.

Question 27.
How many orbitals are possible for n = 4?
Answer:
When n = 0, l = 0, 1,2 and 3. Hence, there are four subshells namely, s, p, d and f
l = 0, m1 = 0; one 4s orbital, l = 1, m = -1, 0, +1; three 4p orbitals,
l = 2, m1 = – 2, -1, 0, +1, +2; five 4d orbitals and
l = 3, m1 = – 3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3; seven 4f orbitals. Hence, the number of possible orbitals when n = 4 are sixteen.

Question 28.
How many radial nodes for 25, 4p, 5d and 4f orbitals exhibit? How many angular nodes?
Answer:
The number of radial nodes is equal to (n – l – 1) and angular nodes is l.

OrbitalNlRadial node (n – l – 1)Angular node, l
2s2010
4p4121
5d5222
4f4303

The number of radial nodes for 2s, 4p, 5d, and 4f orbitals are respectively 1,2,2 and 0 and the number of angular nodes for 2s, 4p, 5d, and 4f orbitals respectively are 0, 1, 2, and 3.

Question 29.
The stabilization of a half-filled d – orbital is more pronounced than that of the p-orbital. Why?
Answer:
The exactly half-filled orbitals have greater stability. The reason for their stability are –

  1. symmetry
  2. exchange energy.

(1) Symmetry: The half-filled orbitals are more symmetrical than partially filled orbitals and this symmetry leads to greater stability.

(2) Exchange energy: The electrons with the same spin in the different orbitals of the same sub-shell can exchange their position. Each such exchange releases energy and this is known as exchange energy. Greater the number of exchanges, the greater the exchange energy, and hence greater the stability. In d-orbital, 10 exchanges are possible but in p-orbital 6 exchanges are possible. So, d – orbital with 5 unpaired electrons (10 exchanges)n i.e. half-filled is more stable than p – orbital with 3 unpaired electrons (6 exchanges).

Question 30.
Consider the following electronic arrangements for the d5 configuration.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 2
(i) Which of these represents the ground state?
(ii) Which configuration has the maximum exchange energy?
Answer:
(i) The ground state electronic configuration is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 3

(ii) The configuration has the maximum exchange energy is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 31.
State and explain Paull’s exclusion principle.
Answer:
Pauli’s exclusion principle states that “No two electrons in an atom can have the same set of values of all four quantum numbers”.
Illustration: H(Z = 1) 1s1.
One electron is present in hydrogen atom, the four quantum numbers are n = 1, l = 0, m = 0 and s = + \(\frac {1}{2}\). For helium Z = 2. He: 1s2. In this one electron has the quantum number same as that of hydrogen, n = 1,l = 0, m = 0 and s = +½ For other electron, fourth quantum number is different, i.e. n = 1, l = 0, m = 0 and s = – ½.

Question 32.
Define orbital. What are ‘n’ and ‘l’ values for 3px and 4d x2 – y2 electron?
Answer:
Orbital is a three-dimensional space in which the probability of finding the electron is maximum. The values of ‘n’ and ‘l’ for 3px orbital are n = 3 and l = 1, 4d x2 – y2 orbital are n = 4 and l = 2.

Question 33.
Explain briefly the time-independent Schrodinger wave equation.
Answer:
Erwin Schrodinger expressed the wave nature of electrons in terms of a differential equation. This equation determines the change of wave function in space depending on the field of force in which the electron moves. The time-independent Schrodinger equation can be expressed as
Hψ = Eψ, where H is called Hamiltonian operator, ψ is the wave function and is a function of position coordinates of the particle and is denoted as ψ(x, y, z), E is the energy of the system.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 4
The above Schrodinger wave equation does not contain time as a variable and is referred to as time-independent Schrodinger wave equation. This equation can be solved only for certain values of E, the total energy, i.e., the energy of the system is quantized. The permitted total energy values are called eigenvalues and corresponding wave functions represent the atomic orbitals.

Question 34.
Calculate the uncertainty in position of an electron, if ∆v = 0.1 % and υ = 2.2 × 106 ms-1.
Answer:
Heisenberg’s Uncertainty Principle is ∆x. ∆v > h/4πm.
Given:
∆v = 0.1%,
υ = 22 × 106 ms-1.
h = 6.626 × 10-34 kgm2s-1 .
m = 9.1 X 10 21 kg.
∆v = \(\frac{0.1 \times 2.2 \times 10^{6} \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}}{100}\)

= 2.2 × 103 ms-1
Uncertainty in position,
∆x ≥ \(\frac{h}{4 \pi m}\)
∆x ≥ \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{kgm}^{2} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{9.1 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg} . \times 2.2 \times 10^{3} \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}}\)

∆x ≥ 2.64 × 10-8 m.

Question 35.
Determine the values of all the four quantum numbers of the 8th electron in the O – atom and 15th electron in the Cl atom and the last electron in Chromium.
Answer:
(1) O (Z = 8) 1s2 2s2 2px2 2py1 2pz1
Four quantum numbers for 2px1 electron in oxygen atom:
n = principal quantum number = 2
l = azimuthal quantum number =1
m = magnetic quantum number =+1
s = spin quantum number = +\(\frac {1}{2}\)

(2) Cl (Z = 17) 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3px2 3py2 3pz1
Four quantum numbers for 15th electron in chlorine atom:
n = 3, l = 1, m = 0, s = + ½

(3) Cr (Z = 24) 1s2 2s2 2p2 3s2 3p2 3d2 4s1
n = 3, l = 2, m = +2, s = + ½

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 36.
The quantum mechanical treatment of the hydrogen atom gives the energy value:
En = –\(\frac{-13.6}{n^{2}}\) eV/atom
(i) Use this expression to find ∆E between n = 3 and n = 4.
(ii) Calculate the wavelength corresponding to the above transition.
Answer:
Energy of the electron in the nth orbit is
En = –\(\frac{-13.6}{n^{2}}\)eV/atom.

When n = 3,
E3 = \(\frac{-13.6 \mathrm{eV} / \text { atom }=-1.51 \mathrm{eV} / \text { atom }}{9}\)

When n = 4,
E4 = \(\frac{-13.6 \mathrm{eV} / \text { atom }=-0.85 \mathrm{eV} / \text { atom }}{16}\)

∆E = (E4 – E3) = (-0.85) – (-1.51) = 0.66 eV/atom
Wavelength corresponding to this transition,

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 5

Question 37.
How fast must a 54g tennis ball travel in order to have a de Broglie wavelength that is equal to that of a photon of green light 5400 Å?
Answer:
de Broglie wavelength,
λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}\)
Given:
de Broglie wavelength, λ = 5400 Å and mass, m = 54 g.
Velocity of the tennis ball
v = \(\frac{h}{m \lambda}\)

v = \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} J s}{54 \times 10^{-3} k g \times 5400 \times 10^{-10} m}\)

v = 2.27 × 10-26 ms-1

Question 38.
For each of the following, give the sub level designation, the allowable m values and the number of orbitals,
(i) n = 1, l = 2
(ii) n = 5, l = 3
(iii) n = 7, l = 0
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 6

Question 39.
Give the electronic configuration of Mn2+ and Cr3+.
Answer:
1. Mn (Z = 25)
Mn → Mn2+ + 2e
Mn2+ electronic configuration is 1s 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 3d5

2. Cr (Z = 24)
Cr → Cr3+ + 3e
Cr3+ electronic configuration is Is2 2s2 2p6 3s23p6 3d3

Question 40.
Describe the Aufbau principle.
Answer:
Aufbau Principle states that “In the ground state of the atoms, the orbitals are filled in the order of their increasing energies”. That is the electrons first occupy the lowest energy orbital available to them. Once the lower energy orbitals are completely filled, then the electrons enter the next higher energy orbitals. The order of filling of various orbitals as per the Aufbau principle is given in the figure. which is in accordance with the (n + l) rule.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 7

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 41.
An atom of an element contains 35 electrons and 45 neutrons. Deduce
(i) the number of protons
(ii) the electronic configuration for the element
(iii) All the four quantum numbers for the last electron.
Answer:
(i) Atomic Number of the element, z = No. of protons or No. of electrons. = 35
Mass number of the element, A = No. of protons + No of neutrons = 35 + 45 = 80
Number of Protons = 80 – 45 = 35.

(ii) Electronic configuration of the element (z = 35)
1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s2 3d10 4p5

(iii) Quantum number for the last electron (4pz),
n = 4, l = 1, m = +1, or -1 s = +1/2

Question 42.
Show that the circumference of the Bohr orbit for the hydrogen atom is an integral multiple of the de Broglie wavelength associated with the electron revolving around the nucleus.
Answer:
According to the de Broglie concept, the electron that revolves around the nucleus exhibits both particle and wave character. In order for the electron wave to exist in phase, the circumference of the orbit should be an integral multiple of the wavelength of the electron wave, Otherwise, the electron wave is out of phase.
Circumference of the orbit = nλ
2πr = nλ
2πr = \(\frac{n h}{m v}\)
Rearranging,
mvr = \(\frac{n h}{m v}\)
Angular momentum = \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)
The above equation was already predicted by Bohr.
Hence, de Broglie and Bohr’s concepts are in agreement with each other.

Question 43.
Calculate the energy required for the process.
He+(g) → He2+(g) + e
The ionization energy for the H atom in its ground state is — 13.6 eV/atom.
Answer:
He+(g) → He2+(g) + e and
En = – 13.6z2/n2
El = – \(\frac{13.6(2)^{2}}{(1)^{2}}\) = -56.4 eV

E = \(\frac{-13.6(2)^{2}}{(\infty)^{2}}\) = 0

Required energy for the given process is,
E – El = 0 – (-56.4) = 56.4 eV.

Question 44.
An ion with mass number 37 possesses unit negative charge. It the ion contains 11.1% more neutrons than electrons. Find the symbol of the ion.
Answer:
Let the number of electrons in an ion = x
number of neutrons = n = x + \(\frac{11.1}{100}\) eV = 1.111 x
(As the number of neutrons is 11.1% more than the number of electrons)
In the neutral of the atom, a number of electrons.
e = x – 1 (as the ion carries -1 charge)
Similarly number of protons = P = x – 1
Number of protons + number of neutrons = mass number = 37
(x – 1) + 1.111 x = 37 .
2.111 x = 37 +1
2.111 x = 38
x = \(\frac{38}{2.111}\) = 18.009 = 18
∴ Number of protons = atomic number – 1 = 18-1 = 17
∴ The symbol of the ion = \(_{17}^{37} \mathrm{Cl}\).

Question 45.
The Li2+ ion is a hydrogen-like ¡on that can be described by the Bohr model. Calculate the Bohr radius of the third orbit and calculate the energy of an electron in 4th orbit.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 8

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 46.
Protons can be accelerated in particle accelerators. Calculate the wavelength (in Å) of such accelerated proton moving at 2.85 × 108ms-1 (mass of proton is 1.673 × 10-27 kg).
Answer:
Given:
velocity, v = 2.85 × 108ms-1.
mass, m = 1.673 × 10-27 kg
λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}\)

λ = \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{kgms}^{-1}}{1.673 \times 10-27 \mathrm{~kg} \times 2-85 \times 10^{8} \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}}\)

λ = 1.389 × 10-8 Å

Question 47.
What is the de Broglie wavelength (in cm) of a 160g cricket ball travelling at 140 Km hr-1.
Answer:
Given:
velocity, v = 140 km/hr. = \(\frac{140 \times 10^{3}}{60 \times 60 \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}}\)

mass, m = 160g = 160 × 10-3 kg
λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}\)
λ =\(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{kgm}^{2} \mathrm{~s}^{-\mathrm{le}}}{160 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~kg} \times 3.88 \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}}\)

λ = 1.605 × 10-34 m.

Question 48.
Suppose that the uncertainty in determining the position of an electron in an orbit is 0.6 Å. What is the uncertainty in its momentum?
Answer:
Heisenberg Uncertainity Principle is ∆x . ∆p ≥ \(\frac{h}{4 \pi}\)
Given:
∆x = 0.6 Å = 0.6 × 10-10 m
h = 6.626 × 10-34 kgm2s-1
Uncertainity in momentum,
∆p ≥ \(\frac{h}{4 \pi \Delta x}\)

∆p ≥ \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{kgm}^{2} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}{4 \times 3.14 \times 0.6 \times 10^{-10} \mathrm{~m}}\)

∆p ≥ 8.8 × 10-25 kgms-1

Question 49.
Show that if the measurement of the uncertainty in the location of the particle is equal to its de Broglie wavelength, the minimum uncertainty in its velocity (∆V) is equal to 1/4π of its velocity(V)
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 9

Question 50.
What is the de Brogue wave length of an electron, which is accelerated from the rest, through a potential difference of 100V?
Answer:
Potential difference = 100 V = 100 × 106 × 10-19 J
λ = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{2} \text { mev }}\)

λ = \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \mathrm{Kgm}^{2} \mathrm{~s}}{\sqrt{2} \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31} \mathrm{~kg} \times 100 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19} \mathrm{~J}}\)

λ = 1.22 × 10-10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 51.
Identify the missing quantum numbers and the sub energy level.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 10
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 11

11th Chemistry Guide Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom Additional Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best Answer:

Question 1.
The angular momentum of the electron in the nth orbit is
(a) \(\frac{\pi h}{2 n}\)

(b) \(\frac{2 n h}{\pi}\)

(c) \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)

(d) \(\frac{2 \pi}{n h}\)
Answer:
(c) \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)

Question 2.
The frequency of radiation emitted when an electron jumps from higher energy state (E2) to a lower energy state (E1) is given by
(a) v = \(\frac{\left(E_{2}+E_{1}\right)}{h}\)

(b) v = \(\frac{\left(E_{1}+E_{2}\right)}{h}\)

(c) v = \(\frac{\left(E_{1}-E_{2}\right)}{h}\)

(d) v = \(\frac{\left(E_{2}-E_{1}\right)}{h}\)
Answer:
(d) v = \(\frac{\left(E_{2}-E_{1}\right)}{h}\)

Question 3.
Splitting of spectral lines in the presence of a magnetic field is called
(a) Zeeman effect
(b) Stark effect
(e) shielding effect
(d) Compton effect
Answer:
(a) Zeeman effect

Question 4.
Which one of the following has zero rest mass?
(a) electron
(b) proton
(c) neutron
(d) photon
Answer:
(d) photon

Question 5.
For a microscopic particle such as an electron, the mass is of the order of
(a) 10-29 kg
(b) 10-31 kg
(c) 1031 kg
(d) 10-30 kg
Answer:
(b) 10-31 kg

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 6.
Which one of the following has insignificant de Broglie wavelength?
(a) electron
(b) proton
(e) neutron
(d) iron ball
Answer:
(d) iron ball

Question 7.
Which of the following statements are true about de Broglie wavelength?
(i) The particle travels at a speed much higher than the speed of light.
(ii) The particle can have high linear momentum.
(iii) The mass of the particle is of the order of 10-30 kg.
(iv) The particle travels at speed much less than the speed of light.
(a) (i) and (ii)
(b) (iii) and (iv)
(c) (i) and (iii)
(d) (ii) and (iv)
Answer:
(b) (iii) and (iv)

Question 8.
The correct mathematical expression/s for Heisenberg Uncertainty principle is
(i) ∆x . ∆p ≥ \(\frac{h}{4 \pi}\)

(ii) ∆x . ∆p ≥ \(\frac{h}{4 \pi m}\)

(iii) ∆x . ∆v ≥ \(\frac{h}{4 \pi m}\)

(iv) ∆x . ∆v ≥ \(\frac{h}{4 \pi}\)
(a) (i) and (ii)
(b) (ii) and(iv)
(c) (i) and (iii)
(d) (ii) and (iii)
Answer:
(c) (i) and (iii)

Question 9.
The wave nature of electron was experimentally confirmed by
(a) Louis de Broglie
(b) Davisson and German
(c) Schrodinger
(d) Niels Bohr
Answer:
(b) Davisson and German

Question 10.
The term ‘ ψ ’ in the Schrodinger equation is
(a) Eigenvalue
(b) Hamiltonian operator
(c) Wave function
(d) all of these
Answer:
(c) Wave function

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 11.
The permitted total energy values in the Schrodinger equation are called
(a) eigenvalues
(b) eigen functions
(c) wave functions
(d) Hamiltonian operator
Answer:
(a) eigenvalues

Question 12.
_______ is a three-dimensional space in which the probability of finding the electron is maximum.
(a) orbit
(b) Orbital
(c) wave function
(d) eigenvalue
Answer:
(b) Orbital

Question 13.
Which of the following has always positive value?
(a) ψ
(b) ψ2
(c) both ψ and ψ2
(d) ψ3
Answer:
(b) ψ2

Question 14.
The maximum number of electrons that can be accommodated in M shell is
(a) 8
(b) 32
(c) 16
(d) 18
Answer:
(d) 18

Question 15.
The maximum number of electrons that can be accommodated in a given subshell is
(a) (2l + 1)
(b) 4l + 2
(c) l + 2
(d) 2(l + 1)
Answer:
(b) 4l + 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 16.
The region where the probability density function reduces to zero is called
(a) wave function
(b) orbital
(c) nodal surface
(d) probability density region
Answer:
(c) nodal surface

Question 17.
Number of subshells and electrons associated with n = 4 respectively are
(a) 4, 16
(b) 32, 64
(c) 16, 32
(d) 8, 16
Answer:
(c) 16, 32

Question 18.
The radial wave function in the ψ(r, θ, φ) = R(r), f(θ), g(φ) is
(a) f(θ)
(b) g(φ)
(c) R(r)
(d) f(θ) and g(φ)
Answer:
(c) R(r)

Question 19.
The plot of _______ shows the maximum probability that occurs at a distance of 0.52 Å from the nucleus.
(a) 4π2r2 vs ψ2
(b) 4π2 r2 ψ2 vs r2
(c) 4π2 ψ2 vs r
(d) 4π2 ψ2 vs r2
Answer:
(d) 4π2 ψ2 vs r2

Question 20.
The number of radial nodes for a 3s orbital is
(a) 3
(b) 2
(c) 1
(d) 0
Answer:
(b) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 21.
The number radial nodes for a ‘nd’ orbital is
(a) (n – 1)
(b) (n – l)
(c) (n – l + 1)
(d) (n – l – 1)
Answer:
(d) (n – l – 1)

Question 22.
The order of the effective nuclear charge felt by an electron in an orbital within a shell is
(a) s < p < d < f
(b) s > p > d > f
(c) s < p ≈ d < f
(d) s ≈ p > d ≈ f
Answer:
(b) s > p > d > f

Question 23.
Which of the following sequences shows the correct increasing order of energy’?
(a) 3s, 3p, 4s, 3d, 4p, 5s, 4d, 5p
(b) 3s, 3p, 4s, 4p, 3d, 5s, 4d, 5p
(c) 3s, 3p, 4s, 4p, 3d, 5s, 5p, 4d
(d) 3s, 3p, 4s, 4p, 3d, 4d, 5s, 5p
Answer:
(a) 3s, 3p, 4s, 3d, 4p, 5s, 4d, 5p

Question 24.
The orbital with following quantum numbers (i) n = 4,1 = 3 and (ii) n = 3 and 1 = 2 are
(a) 3d, 4f
(b) 3d, 4d
(c) 3f, 4f
(d) 3p, 4f
Answer:
(c) 3f, 4f

Question 25.
The energy of one photon of a beam of light with wavelength 3.31 × 10-6 m is
(a) 6 × 10-20 J
(b) 2 × 10-20 J
(c) 6 × 10-21 J
(d) 2 × 10-21 J
Answer:
(a) 6 × 10-20 J

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 26.
The ratio of energies of two radiations with wavelengths of 300 nm and 900 nm is
(a) 1 : 3
(b) 2 : 1
(c) 3 : 1
(d) 1 : 2
Answer:
(c) 3 : 1

Question 27.
The momentum of a particle which has a wavelength of 6.62 Å is (in kg ms-1)
(a) 10-20
(b) 10-22
(c) 10-34
(d) 10-24
Answer:
(d) 10-24

Question 28.
If the energy difference between the ground state of an atom and its excited state is 3.31 × 10-19 J, the wavelength of the photon required to produce this transition is
(a) 3 × 10-9 m
(b) 6 × 10-7 m
(c) 3 × 10-8 m
(d) 6 × 10-6 m
Answer:
(b) 6 × 10-7 m

Question 29.
The spectrum of He+ is similar to
(a) Li+
(b) H+
(c) He
(d) Li2+
Answer:
(c) He

Question 30.
An atom has two electrons in the K shell, eight electrons in the L shell, and eight electrons in the M shell. The number of ‘s’ electrons present in that element is
(a) 18
(b) 10
(c) 6
(d) 4
Answer:
(c) 6

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 31.
The atomic number of an element ‘A’ is 25. How many electrons are present in the third shell of the element in its A3+ state?
(a) 10
(b) 12
(c) 15
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 12

Question 32.
Which of the following sets of quantum numbers are not possible?
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 12
(a) (i), (iii) and (iv)
(b) (i), (iv) and (v)
(c) (iii), (iv) and (v)
(d) (i), (ii) and (iii)
Answer:
(c) (iii), (iv) and (v)

Question 33.
ψ2 is always
(a) negative
(b) positive
(c) either positive or negative
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) positive

Question 34.
Which of the following sets of quantum numbers represents the highest energy of an atom?
(a) n = 4, l = 1, m = 0, s = +1/2
(b) n = 3, l = 0, m = 0, s = +1/2
(c) n = 3, l = 0, m = 1, s = +1/2
(d) n = 4, l = 0, m = 0, s = +1/2
Answer:
(a) n = 4, l = 1, m = 0, s = +1/2

Question 35.
The number of possible exchanges for [Ar] 3d4 4s2 configuration is
(a) 10
(b) 6
(c) 4
(d) 1
Answer:
(b) 6

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

II. Very Short Question and Answers (2 Marks):

Question 1.
Write a note about J.J. Thomson’s atomic model.
Answer:

  • J.J. Thomson’s cathode ray experiment revealed that atoms consist of negatively charged particles called electrons.
  • He proposed that an atom is a positively charged sphere in which the electrons are embedded like the seeds in the watermelon.

Question 2.
What is the Zeeman effect?
Answer:
The splitting of spectral lines in the presence of a magnetic field is called the Zeeman effect.

Question 3.
What is Stark effect?
Answer:
The splitting of spectral lines in the presence of electric field is called Stark effect.

Question 4.
Write the limitation of Bohr’s postulates?
Answer:
Bohr’s postulates are applicable to one electron speciesvsuch as H, He+ and Li2+ etc.,

Question 5.
Write the formulae for the radius and energy of electron in the nth orbit of electron.
Answer:
Radius of electron in the nth orbit,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 13

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 6.
Write de Broglie equation and explain the terms in it.
Answer:
de Beoglie equation is λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}\)
where λ = de Broglie wavelength of matter waves, m = mass of the particle and v = velocity.

Question 7.
What are quantum numbers?
Answer:

  • The electron in an atom can be characterized by a set of four quantum numbers, namely principal quantum number (n), azimuthal quantum number (l), magnetic quantum number (m), and spin quantum number (s).
  • When the Schrodinger equation is solved for a wave function T, the solution contains the first three quantum numbers n, l, and m.
  • The fourth quantum number arises due to the spinning of the electron about its own axis.

Question 8.
State Heisenberg Uncertainty principle.
Answer:
It is impossible to accurately determine both the position as well as the momentum of a microscopic particle simultaneously.

Question 9.
What is classical mechanics?
Answer:
The motion of objects that we come across in our daily life can be well described based on Newton’s law of motion is called classical mechanics.

Question 10.
What is the limitation of classical mechanics?
Answer:
Classical mechanics does not consider the dual nature of the matter which is significant for microscopic particles. As a consequence, it fails to explain the motion of microscopic particles.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 11.
What is quantum mechanics?
Answer:
Based on Heisenberg’s principle and the dual I nature of the microscopic particles, a new mechanics I developed to study the motion of microscopic particles is called quantum mechanics.

Question 12.
What is Schrodinger’s equation?
Answer:
Erwin Schrodinger expressed the wave nature of electron in terms of the differential equation is called Schrodinger equation. This equation determines the change of wave equation in space depending on the field of force in which the electron moves.

Question 13.
Write the Schrodinger equation in terms of the operator?
Answer:
The time-independent Schrodinger equation can be expressed as Hψ = Eψ
where H is called Hamiltonian operator, ψ is the wave function and E is the energy of the system.

Question 14.
Write the Schrodinger equation in terms of a differential equation?
Answer:
The time independent Schrodinger equation in terms of a differential equation is
\(\frac{\partial^{2} \Psi}{\partial x^{2}}+\frac{\partial^{2} \Psi}{\partial y^{2}}+\frac{\partial^{2} \Psi}{\partial z^{2}}+\frac{8 \pi^{2} m}{h^{2}}(\mathrm{E}-\mathrm{V}) \Psi=0\)

Question 15.
What is a Hamiltonian operator?
Answer:
The total energy operator is called Hamiltonian operator and it can be expressed as
Ĥ = [latex]\frac{-h^{2}}{8 \pi^{2} m}\left(\frac{\partial^{2}}{\partial x^{2}}+\frac{\partial^{2}}{\partial y^{2}}+\frac{\partial^{2}}{\partial z^{2}}\right)+V[/latex]

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 16.
Define an orbital.
Answer:
Orbital is a three-dimensional space in which the probability of finding the electron is maximum.

Question 17.
Calculate the total number of angular nodes and radial nodes present in 4p and 4d orbitals.
Answer:
1. For 4p orbital:
Number of angular nodes = l
For 4p orbital 7 = l
Number of angular nodes = l
Number of radial nodes = n – l – 1 = 4 -1 -1 = 2
Total number of nodes = n -1 = 4 – 1 = 3
1 angular node and 2 radial nodes.

2. For 4d orbital:
Number of angular nodes = l
For 4d orbital l = 2
Number of angular nodes = 2
Number of radial nodes = n – l – 1 = 4 – 2 – 1 = 1
Total number of nodes = n – l = 4 – l = 3
1 radial nodes and 2 angular node.

Question 18.
The energies of the same orbital decrease with an increase in the atomic number. Justify this statement.
Answer:
The energy of the 2s orbital of a hydrogen atom is greater than that of 2s orbital of lithium and that of lithium is greater than that of sodium and so on because of H (Z =1), Li (Z = 3), and Na (Z = 11). When the atomic number increases, the energies of the same orbital decrease. E2s(H) > E2s(Li) > E2s(Na) > E2s(K) ………….

Question 19.
What is the principal quantum number?
Answer:
The principal quantum number represents the energy level in which an electron revolving around the nucleus and is denoted by the symbol ‘n’.

Question 20.
What is a nodal surface or a radial node?
Answer:
The region where this probability density function reduces to zero is called nodal surface or a radial node.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 21.
What is the significance of the solution to the Schrodinger equation?
Answer:
The solution to the Schrodinger equation gives the permitted energy values called eigenvalues and the wave functions corresponding to the eigenvalues are called atomic orbitals.

Question 22.
What are radial and angular wave functions?
Answer:
The solution of the Schrodinger wave equation for one electron system can be expressed in spherical polar coordinates as ψ(r, θ, φ) = R(r). f(θ). g(φ) Where R(r) is called a radial wave function, f(θ) and g(φ) are called angular wave functions.

Question 23.
What is the ground state?
Answer:
The electron present in the lowest energy state is called the ground state.

Question 24.
State (n + l) rule.
Answer:
The lower the value of (n + l) for an orbital, the lower is its energy. If two orbitals have the same value of (n + l), the orbital with lower value of ‘n’ will have the lower energy.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

III. Short Question and Answers (3 Marks):

Question 1.
What are the conclusions of Rutherford’s α – rays scattering experiment?
Answer:

  • Rutherford bombarded a thin gold foil with a stream of fast-moving α – particles.
  • It was observed that most of the a-particles passed through the foil.
  • Some of them were deflected through a small angle.
  • Very few α- particles were reflected back by 180°.
  • Based on these observations, he proposed that in an atom, there is a tiny positively charged nucleus and the electrons are moving around the nucleus with high speed.

Question 2.
Write the assumptions of Bohr’s atom model.
Answer:
Bohr’s atom model is based on the following assumptions:
(i) The energies of electrons are quantized.
(ii) The electron is revolving around the nucleus in a certain fixed circular path called stationary orbit.
(iii) Electron can revolve only in those orbitsJn which the angular momentum {mvr) of the electron must be equal to an integral multiple of \(\frac{h}{2 \pi}\)
i,e., mvr = \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\), where n = 1, 2, 3, … etc.,
(iv) As long as an electron revolves in the fixed orbit, it does lose its energy. However, when an electron jumps from higher energy state (E2) to a lower energy state (E1), the excess energy is emitted as radiation.
The frequency of the emitted radiation is (E2 – E1) = hυ.

Frequency, υ = \(\frac{\left(E_{2}-E_{1}\right)}{h}\)
Conversely, when suitable energy is supplied to an electron, it will jump from lower energy orbit to a higher energy orbit.

Question 3.
Explain Davisson and Germer’s experiment.
Answer:

  • The wave nature of electrons was experimentally confirmed by Davisson and Germer.
  • They allowed the accelerated beam of electrons to fall on a nickel crystal and recorded the diffraction pattern.
  • The resultant diffraction pattern is similar to the X-ray diffraction pattern.
  • The finding of wave nature of electron leads to the development of various experimental techniques such as electron microscope, low energy electron diffraction, etc.

Question 4.
Show that de Broglie and Bohr’s concepts are in agreement with each other.
Answer:
According to the de Broglie concept, the electron that revolves around the nucleus exhibits both particle and wave character. In order for the electron wave to exist in phase, the circumference of the orbit should be an integral multiple of the wavelength of the electron wave, Otherwise, the electron wave is out of phase.
Circumference of the orbit = nλ
2πr = nλ
2πr = \(\frac{n h}{m v}\)
Rearranging,
mvr = \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)
Angular momentum = \(\frac{n h}{2 \pi}\)
The above equation was already predicted by Bohr. Hence, de Broglie and Bohr’s concepts are in agreement with each other.

Question 5.
Write a note about the principal quantum number.
Answer:

  • The principal quantum number represents the energy level in which an electron revolves around the nucleus and is denoted by the symbol ‘n’.
  • The ‘n’ can have the values 1, 2, 3,… n = 1 represents K shell; n=2 represents L shell and n = 3, 4, 5 represent the M, N, O shells, respectively.
  • The maximum number of electrons that can be accommodated in a given shell is 2n2.
  • ‘n’ gives the energy of the electron,

En = \(\frac{(-1312.8) Z^{2}}{n^{2}}\) KJ mol-1 and the distance of the electron from the nucleus is given by rn = \(\frac{(-0.529) n^{2}}{Z}\) A.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 6.
Write the significance of principle quantum number.
Answer:
Principle quantum number represents the energy level in which electron revolves around the nucleus and is denoted by the symbol ‘n’.
(i) The ‘n’ can have the values 1, 2, 3, … n = 1 represent K shell: n = 2 represents L shell and n = 3, 4, 5 represent the M, N, O shells respectively.
(ii) The maximum number of electrons that can be accommodated in a given shell, is 2n2.
(iii) ‘n’ gives the energy of the electron,
En = \(\frac{(-1312.8) Z^{2}}{n^{2} k J m o l^{-1}}\)

and the distance of the electron from the nucleus is given by
rn = \(\frac{(0.529) n^{2}}{Z}\) Å.

Question 7.
Write notes on Azimuthal Quantum number.
Answer:
(i) Azimuthal quantum number is represented by the letter ‘l’ and can take integral values from zero to (n – l), where n is the principle quantum number.
(ii) Each l value represents a subshell. l = 0, 1,2, 3 and 4 represents the s, p, d, f and g orbitals respectively.
(iii) The maximum number of electrons that can be accommodated in a given subshell is 2 (2l + 1).
(iv) It is used to calculate the orbital angular momentum using the expression
Angular momentum = \(\frac{\sqrt{l(l+1) h}}{2 \pi}\)

Question 8.
Write the significance of magnetic quantum numbers.
Answer:
(i) Spin quantum number is denoted by the letter ‘ml’. It takes integral values ranging from -l to +l through 0. i.e., if l = 1: m = -1, 0 and +1.
(ii) Different values of m for a given l value, represent different orientations of orbitals in space.
(iii) The Zeeman effect provides the experimental justification for this quantum number.
(iv) The magnitude of the angular momentum is determined by the quantum number ‘l’ while its direction is given by magnetic quantum number.

Question 9.
Write notes on spin quantum number.
Answer:
(i) The spin quantum number represents the spin of the electron and is denoted by the letter ‘ms‘.
(ii) The electron in an atom revolves not only around the nucleus but also spins. It is usual to write this as an electron spins about its own axis either in a clockwise direction or in an anti-clockwise direction. The visualization is not true. However, spin is to be understood as representing a property that revealed itself in magnetic fields.
(iii) Corresponding to the clockwise and anti¬clockwise spinning of the electron, a maximum of two values are possible for this quantum number.
(iv) The values of ‘ms‘ is equal to -1/2 and +1/2.

Question 10.
Write the significance of ψ and ψ2.
Answer:
The wave function ψ has no physical meaning and the square of the wave function |ψ|2 is related to the probability of finding the electrons within a given volume of space. |ψ|2 varies with the distance from nucleus (radial distribution of the probability) and the direction from the nucleus (angular distribution of the probability).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 11.
Show that the probability of finding the electron is independent of the direction from the nucleus.
Answer:
The variation of the probability of locating the electron on a sphere with nucleus at its centre depends on the azimuthal quamtum number of the orbital in which the electron is present. For 1s orbital, l = 0, and m = 0.
f(θ) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\) and g(φ) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2 \pi}}\)

Therefore, the angular distribution function is equal to \(\frac{1}{2 \sqrt{\pi}}\) i.e., it is independeent of the angle θ and φ. Hence, the probability of finding the electron is independent of the direction from the nucleus.

Question 12.
Sketch the shapes of 1s, 2s and 3s orbitals.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 14

Question 13.
Sketch and explain the shapes of p-orbitals.
Answer:
The shape of the p-orbitais are shown in figure, For p orbitaIs, l = 1 and the corresponding m values are -1, 0 and +1. The three different ‘m’ values indicates that there are three different orientations possible for p orbitals. These orbitals are designated as px, py and pz and the angular distribution for these orbitals shows that the lobes are along the x, y and z axis respectively.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 15

Question 14.
What are ground and excited states?
Answer:
The electron in the hydrogen atom occupies the ly orbital that has the lowest energy. This state is called ground state. When this electron gains some energy, it moves to the higher energy orbitals such as 2s, 2p etc., These states are called excited states.

Question 15.
Explain the significance of effective nuclear charge.
Answer:
In a multi-electron atom, in addition to the electrostatic attractive force between the electron and nucleus, there exists a repulsive force among the electrons. These two forces are operating in the opposite direction. This results in the decrease in the nuclear force of attraction on electron.
The net charge experienced by the electron is called effective nuclear charge. The effective nuclear charge depends on the shape of the orbitals and it decreases with increase in azimuthal quantum number l. The order of the effective nuclear charge felt by a electron in an orbital within the given shell is s > p > d > l.

Greater the effective nuclear charge, greater is the stability of the orbital. Hence, within a given energy level, the energy of the orbitals are in the following order s < p < d <f.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 16.
State and explain Hund’s rule.
Answer:
Hund’s rule of maximum multiplicity states that- electron pairing in the degenerate orbitals does not take place until all the available orbitals contains one electron each. Consider the carbon atom which has six electrons. According to Aufbau principle, the electronic configuration is 1s2, 2s2, 2p2.
It can be represented as below,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 16
In this case, in order to minimize the electron- electron repulsion, the sixth electron enters the unoccupied 2py orbital as per Hund’s rule, i.e., it does not get paired with the fifth electron already present in the 2px orbital.

IV. Long Question and Answers:

Question 1.
Derive de Broglie equation.
Answer:
Albert Einstein proposed that light has dual nature. i.e., light photons behave both like a particle and as a wave. Louis de Broglie extended this concept and proposed that all forms of matter showed dual character. To quantify this relation, he derived an equation for the wave length of a matter wave. He combined the following two equations of energy of which one represents wave character (hυ) and the other represents the particle nature (mc2).
Planck’s quantum hypothesis is
E = hυ ………..(1)
Einstein’s mass-energy relationship,
E = mc2
From (1) and (2), hυ = mc2
\(\frac{h c}{\lambda}\) = mc2
λ = \(\frac{h}{m c}\)
Equation (3) represents the wavelength of photons whose momentum is given by mc. For a particle of matter with mass ‘m’ and moving with a velocity ‘v’, the equation (3) can be written as
λ = \(\frac{h}{m v}\) …………..(4)

The equation (4) is called de Broglie equation for matter waves and this is valid only when the particle travels at speeds much less than the speed of light. This equation implies that a moving particle can be considered as a wave and a wave can exhibit the properties of a particle.

For a particle with high linear momentum the wavelength will be so small and cannot be observed. For a microscopic particle such as an electron, the mass is of the order of 10-31 kg, hence the wavelength is much larger than the size of atom and it becomes significant.

Question 2.
Write the main features of the quantum mechanical model of atom.
Answer:
(i) The energy of electrons in atoms is quantized.
(ii) The existence of quantized electronic energy levels is a direct result of the wave-like properties of electrons.
(iii) According to Heisenberg uncertainty principle, the exact position and momentum of an electron cannot be determined with absolute accuracy. As a consequence, quantum mechanics introduced the concept of orbital. Orbital is a three dimensional space in which the probability of finding the electron is maximum.
(iv) The solution of Schrodinger wave equation for the allowed energies of an atom gives the wave function, ψ, which represents an atomic orbital. The wave nature of electron present in an orbital can be well defined by the wave function ψ.
(v) The wave function, ψ, itself has no physical meaning. However, the probability of finding the electron in a small volume dxdydz around a point (x, y, z) is proportional to |ψ(x, y, z)|2 dxdydz. |ψ(x, y, z)|2 is known as probability density and is always positive.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 3.
Describe the radial distribution function of 1s and 2s orbitals of hydrogen atom.
Answer:
Consider a single electron of hydrogen atom in the ground state for which the quantum numbers are n = 1 and l = 0. i.e., it occupies l.y orbital. The plot R(r)2 versus r for is orbital given in figure.

The graph shows that as the distance between the electron and the nucleus decreases, the probability of finding the electron increases. At r = 0, the quantity R(r)2 is maximum. The maximum value for |ψ|2 is at the nucleus. However, probability of finding the electron in a given spherical shell around the nucleus is important. Let us consider the volume (dV) bounded by two spheres of radii r and r + dr.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 17
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 18

The above plot shows that the maximum probability occurs at distance of 0.52 Å. from the nucleus. This is equal to the Bohr radius. It indicates that the maximum probability of finding the electron around the nucleus is at this distance. However, there is a probability to find the electron at other distances also. The radial distribution function of 2s, orbital of the hydrogen atom represented as follows.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 19

Question 4.
Sketch and explain the shapes of d-orbitals.
Answer:
For ‘d’ orbital l = 2 and the corresponding ‘m’ values are -2, -1, 0, +1, +2. The shape of the ‘d’ orbital looks like a ‘clover leaf’. The five m values give rise to five d orbitals namely dxy, dyz, dzx, dx2 – y2, and dz2. The 3d orbitals contain two nodal planes as shown in figure.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 20
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 21

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom

Question 5.
Sketch and explain the shapes of f-orbitals.
Answer:
For ‘f orbitals, l = 3 and the m values are -3, -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 corresponding to seven f orbitals which are shown in figure. There are three nodal planes in the f orbitals.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Chemistry Guide Chapter 2 Quantum Mechanical Model of Atom 22

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 2 Number Systems Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 2 Number Systems

11th Computer Science Guide Number Systems Text Book Questions and Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Part – I

I. Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1.
Which refers to the number of bits processed by a computer’s CPU? .
a) Byte
b) Nibble
c) Word length
d) Bit
Answer:
c) Word length

Question 2.
How many bytes does 1 KiloByte contain?
a) 1000
b) 8
c) 4
d) 1024
Answer:
d) 1024

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 3.
Expansion for ASCII
a) American School Code for Information Interchange
b) American Standard Code for Information Interchange
c) All Standard Code for Information Interchange
d) American Society Code for Information Interchange
Answer:
b) American Standard Code for Information Interchange

Question 4.
2^50 is referred as
a) Kilo
b) Tera
c) Peta
d) Zetta
Answer:
c) Peta

Question 5.
How many characters can be handled in Binary Coded Decimal System?.
a) 64
b) 255
c) 256
d) 128
Answer:
a) 64

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 6.
For 11012 whai is the Hexadecimal equivalent?
a) F
b) E
c) D
d) B
Answer:
c) D

Question 7.
What is the 1’s complement of 00100110?
a) 00100110
b) 11011001
c) 11010001
d) 00101001
Answer:
b) 11011001

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 8.
Which amongst this is not an Octal number?
a) 645
b) 234
c) 876
d) 123
Answer:
c) 876

Part II

Very Short Answers.

Question 1.
What is data?
Answer:
The term data comes from the word datum which means a raw fact. The data is a fact about people, places, or some objects.
Example: Rajesh, 16, XI.

Question 2.
Write the l’s complement procedure.
Answer:
The steps to be followed to find l’s complement of a number:
Step 1: Convert given Decimal number into Binary
Step 2: Check if the binary number contains 8 bits, if less add O at the left most bit, to make it as 8 bits.
Step 3: Invert all bits (i.e. Change 1 as 0 and 0 as 1)

Example: Find 1’s complement for (-24)10
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 1

Question 3.
Convert (46)10 into a Binary number.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 2

Question 4.
We cannot find l’s complement for (28)10 State reason.
Answer:
Since it is a positive number. 1’s complement will come only for negative numbers.

Question 5.
List the encoding systems for characters in memory.
Answer:
There are several encoding systems used for computers. They are

  • BCD – Binary Coded Decimal
  • EBCDIC – Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code
  • ASCII – American Standard Code for Information Interchange
  • Unicode
  • ISCII – Indian Standard Code for Information Interchange

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Part III

III. Very Short Answers

Question 1.
What is radix of a number system? Give example.
Answer:
Each number system Is uniquely Identified by Its base value or radix. Radix or base Is the count of number of digits In each number system. Radix or base is the general Idea behind positional numbering system. Ex.

Number systemBase / Radix
Binary2
Octal8
Decimal10
Hexadecimal16

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 2.
Write a note on the binary number system.
Answer:
There are only two digits in the Binary system, namely, 0 and 1. The numbers in the binary system are represented to the base 2 and the positional multipliers are the powers of 2.

The leftmost bit in the binary number is called the Most Significant Bit (MSB) and it has the largest positional weight. The rightmost bit is the Least Significant Bit (LSB) and has the smallest positional weight.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 3.
Convert (150)10 into Binary, then convert that Binary number to Octal.
Answer:
Decimal to Binary conversion 150
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 4

Binary to octal conversion
LSB to MSB divide the number into three-digit binary and write the equivalent octal digit
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 5

Question 4.
Write a short note on ISCII.
Answer:
ISCII – Indian Standard Code for Information Interchange (ISCII) is the system of handling the character of Indian local languages. This is an 8 – bit coding system. Therefore it can handle 256 (28) characters. It is recognized by the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS). It is integrated with Unicode.

This system is formulated by the Department of Electronics in India in the year 1986-88 and recognized by the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS). Now, this coding system is integrated with Unicode.

Question 5.
Add : a) -2210 + 1510 b) 2010 + 2510.
Answer:
a) -2210 + 1510
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 6
Answer in 2’s complement form . 11111001 is 2’s complement of 7 which is the answer.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Part IV

IV. Detail Answers.

Question 1.
a) Write the procedure to convert fractional Decimal to Binary.
Answer:
Conversion of fractional Decimal to Binary
The method of repeated multiplication by 2 has to be used to convert such kinds of decimal fractions.

The steps involved in the method of repeated multiplication by 2:

Step 1. : Multiply the decimal fraction by 2 and note the integer part. The integer part is either 0 or 1.
Step 2: Discard the integer part of the previous product. Multiply the fractional part of the previous product by 2. Repeat Step 1 until the same fraction repeats or terminates (0).
Step 3: The resulting integer part forms a sequence of 0’s and 1’s that becomes the binary equivalent of a decimal fraction.
Step 4: The final answer is to be written from the first integer part obtained till the last integer part obtained.
Integer part (last integer part obtained)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 7
Write the integer parts from top to bottom to obtain the equivalent fractional binary number.
Hence
(0.2)10 = (0.00110011.,.)2 = (0.00110011)2.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

b) Convert (98.46)10 to Binary.
Convert (98.46)10 to Binary
Procedure: Conversion of an integral part:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 8
(98)10 = (1100010)2 Conversion of fractional part:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 9

Question 2.
Find l’s Complement and 2’s Complement for the following Decimal number.
a) -98
b) -135
Answer:
a) Conversion of (98)10 into binary
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 10

Conversion of (135)10 into binary
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 11

Question 3.
a) Add 11010102 + 101101)2
Answer:
a) Add 11010102 + 1011012
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 12

b) Subtract 11010112 – 1110102.
Subtract 11010112 – 1110102
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 13

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

11th Computer Science Guide Number Systems Additional Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose The Correct Answer.

Question 1.
The simplest method to represent a negative binary number is called ………………..
(a) signed magnitude
(b) sign bit or parity bit
(c) binary
(d) decimal
Answer:
(a) signed magnitude

Question 2.
Computer understand ________________language.
a) High level
b) Assembly
c) Machine
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Machine

Question 3.
Expansion for BCD ………………..
(a) Binary coded decimal
(b) binary complement decimal
(c) binary computer decimal
(d) binary convert decimal
Answer:
(a) Binary coded decimal

Question 4.
__________is the basic unit of data in computer.
a) BIT
b) BYTE
c) NIBBLE
d) WORD
Answer:
a) BIT

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 5.
The ……………….. operator is defined in boolean algebra by the use of the dot (.) operator.
(a) AND
(b) OR
(c) NOT
(d) NAND
Answer:
(a) AND

Question 6.
Binary digit means __________
a) 0
b) 1
c) either 0 or 1
d) None of these
Answer:
c) either 0 or 1

Question 7.
The convert (65)10 into its equivalent octal number ………………..
(a) (101)8
(b) (101)10
(c) (101)12
(d) (101)4
Answer:
(a) (101)8

Question 8.
A collection of 8 bits is called __________
a) BIT
b) BYTE
C) NIBBLE
d) WORD
Answer:
b) BYTE

Question 9.
……………….. is the general idea behind the positional numbering system.
(a) Radix
(b) Computer memory
(c) Binary number
(d) Decimal number
Answer:
(a) Radix

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 10.
__________refers to the number of bits processed by a computer’s CPU.
a) Word length
b) Nibble
c) Word size
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Word length

Question 11.
Bit means ………………..
(a) nibble
(b) byte
(c) word length
(d) binary digit
Answer:
(d) binary digit

Question 12.
__________is a valid word length of a computer.
a) 64
b) 32
c) 16
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 13.
The computer can understand ……………….. languages.
(a) computer
(b) machine
(c) post
(d) pre
Answer:
(b) machine

Question 14.
1 KiloByte equals to __________bytes.
a) 1024
b) 256
c) 1000
d) 128
Answer:
a) 1024

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 15.
How many bytes does 1 zettabyte contain?
(a) 290
(b) 280
(c) 270
(d) 260
Answer:
(c) 270

Question 16.
1024 MegaBytes equals to _________
a) 1 GigaByte
b) 1 TeraByte
c) 1 YottaByte
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 1 GigaByte

Question 18.
1-kilo byte represents ……………….. bytes.
(a) 512
(b) 256
(c) 1024
(d) 64
Answer:
(c) 1024

Question 18.
1Kb equals to _________bytes.
a) 210
b) 220
c) 230
d) 240
Answer:
a) 210

Question 19.
How many megabytes does 1 GB contain?
(a) 220
(b) 210
(c) 230
(d) 240
Answer:
(b) 210

Question 20.
1 GB equals to ________ bytes.
a) 210
b) 220
c) 230
d) 240
Answer:
c) 230

Question 21.
What is the 1’ s complement of 11001?
(a) 11100110
(b) 01010101
(c) 11110000
(d) 100100111
Answer:
(a) 11100110

Question 22.
1 PetaByte(PB) equals to _________bytes.
a) 250
b) 260
c) 270
d) 280
Answer:
a) 250

Question 23.
The hexadecimal equivalent of 15 is ………………..
(a) A
(b) B
(c) E
(d) F
Answer:
(d) F

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 24.
1 ZettaByte (1ZB) equals to _______ bytes.
a) 250
b) 260
c) 270
d) 280
Answer:
c) 270

Question 25.
The radix of a hexadecimal number is ………………..
(a) 2
(b) 8
(c) 16
(d) 10
Answer:
(c) 16

Question 26.
Computer memory is normally represented in terms of ________ bytes.
a) Kilo
b) Mega
c) Kilo or Mega
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Kilo or Mega

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 27.
The most commonly used number system is ………………..
(a) binary
(b) decimal
(c) octal
(d) hexadecimal
Answer:
(b) decimal

Question 28.
The most commonly used coding scheme to represent character set and the number is ________
a) BCD
b) ASCII
c) EBCDIC
d) All the above
Answer:
b) ASCII

Question 29.
What does MSB mean?
(a) Major sign bit
(b) Most sign bit
(c) Minor sign bit
(d) Most significant bit
Answer:
(d) Most significant bit

Question 30.
The ASCII value for blank space is _________
a) 43
b) 42
c) 32
d) 62
Answer:
c) 32

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 31.
The binary equivalent of hexadecimal number B is ………………..
(a) 1011
(b) 1100
(c) 1001
(d) 1010
Answer:
(a) 1011

Question 32.
The most commonly used numbering system in real life is the _________number system.
a) Hexadecimal
b) Octal
c) Binary
d) Decimal
Answer:
d) Decimal

Question 33.
What is the range of ASCII values for lower case alphabets?
(a) 65 to 90
(b) 65 to 122
(c) 97 to 122
(d) 98 to 122
Answer:
(c) 97 to 122

Question 34.
_________is the count of number of digits in each number system.
a) base
b) radix
c) base or radix
d) symbols
Answer:
c) base or radix

Question 35.
What is the ASCII value for blank space?
(a) 8
(b) 2
(c) 18
(d) 32
Answer:
(d) 32

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 36.
Identify the true statement from the following.
a) In the positional number system, each decimal digit is weighted relative to its position in the number.
b) A numbering system is a way of representing numbers.
c) The speed of a computer depends on the number of bits it can process at once.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 37.
Which one of the following bits has the smallest positional weight?
(a) MSB
(b) LSB
(c) UPS
(d) USB
Answer:
(b) LSB

Question 38.
The rightmost bit in the binary number is called as the __________
a) MSB
b) LSB
c) FSB
d) None of these
Answer:
b) LSB

Question 39.
Name the person who proposed the basic principles of Boolean Algebra?
(a) Wiliam Boole
(b) George Boole
(c) James Boole
(d) Boolean George
Answer:
(b) George Boole

Question 40.
_______ numbers are used as a shorthand form of a binary sequence.
a) Hexadecimal
b) Octal
c) Decimal
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Hexadecimal

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 41.
What is the other name for a logical statement?
(a) Truth values
(b) Truth functions
(c) Truth table
(d) Truth variables
Answer:
(b) Truth functions

Question 42.
In hexadecimal number system letter ‘E’ represents _______
a) 12
b) 13
c) 14
d) 15
Answer:
c) 14

Question 43.
The NOT operator is represented by the symbol.
(a) over bar
(b) single apostrophe
(c) a and b
(d) plus
Answer:
(c) a and b

Question 44.
_______is a method to convert decimal number to binary number.
a) Repeated division by 2
b) Sum of powers of 2
c) Repeated addition by 2
d) Either A or B
Answer:
d) Either A or B

Question 45.
The output for the AND operator is ………………..
(a) A + B
(b) –
(c) A.B
(d) AB + C
Answer:
(c) A.B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 46.
Computer can handle _______ numbers.
a) signed
b) unsigned
c) signed and unsigned
d) None of these
Answer:
c) signed and unsigned

Question 47.
Which gate takes only one input?
(a) OR
(b) AND
(c) NOT
(d) XOR
Answer:
(c) NOT

Question 48.
In the signed magnitude method, the leftmost bit is called _______bit.
a) sign
b) parity
c) sign or parity
d) None of these
Answer:
c) sign or parity

Question 49.
Which is not a derived date?
(a) AND
(b) NAND
(c) NOR
(d) XOR
Answer:
(a) AND

Question 50.
The numbers are represented in computers in _______method.
a) Signed magnitude representation
b) 1’s complement
c) 2’s complement
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 51.
The statement “C equal the complement of A or B” means
(a) C = A + B
(b) C = \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}+\overline{\mathrm{B}}\)
(c) C = \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\) + \(\overline{\mathrm{B}}\)
(d) C = \(\overline{\mathrm{A}\mathrm{B}}\)
Answer:
(a) C = A + B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 52.
If the number has_______sign, it will be considered as negative in signed magnitude representation.
a) +
b) no
c) –
d) A or B
Answer:
c) –

Question 54.
What is the output of the XOR gate?
(a) C = A% B
(b) C = A \(\otimes\) A
(c) C = A \(\odot\) B
(d) C = A \(\oplus\) B
Answer:
(d) C = A \(\oplus\) B

Question 54.
2’s complement of (0001i000)2 is_______
a) 11100111
b) 00011001
c) 11101000
d) None of these
Answer:
c) 11101000

Question 55.
Find A + \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\) .B = ………………..
(a) A + B
(b) A.B
(c) \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\).B
(d) A.\(\overline{\mathrm{B}}\)
Answer:
(d) A.\(\overline{\mathrm{B}}\)

Question 56.
When two binary numbers are added _______will be the output.
a) sum
b) carry
c) sum and carry
d) None of these
Answer:
c) sum and carry

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 57.
When subtracting 1 from 0, borrow 1 from the next _______
a) LSB
b) MSB
c) either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) MSB

Question 58.
Find the wrong pair from the following:
(a) Null element : A + 1 = 1
(b) Involution : \(\overset { = }{ A }\) = A
(c) Demorgan’s : \(\overline{\mathrm{A+B}}\) =\(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\) . \(\overline{\mathrm{A}}\)
(d) Commutative : A + B = B . A
Answer:
(d) Commutative : A + B = B . A

Question 59.
_______ is the character encoding system.
a) BCD and ISCII
b) EBCDIC
c) ASCII and Unicode
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 60.
With 2 inputs in the truth table, how many sets of values will be obtained.
(a) 4
(b) 8
(c) 2
(d) 1
Answer:
(a) 4

Question 61.
EBCDIC stands for _______
a) Extensive Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code
b) Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code
c) Extended Binary Coded Digit Interchange Code
d) Extended Bit Coded Decimal Interchange Code.
Answer:
b) Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 62.
ASCII stands for _______
a) Arithmetic Standard Code for Information Interchange
b) American Structured Code for Information Interchange
c) American Standard Code for Information Interchange
d) American Standard Code for Instant Interchange
Answer:
c) American Standard Code for Information Interchange

Question 63.
ISCII stands for_______
a) International Standard Code for Information Interchange
b) Indian Structured Code for Information Interchange
c) India’s Standard Code for Information Interchange
d) Indian Standard Code for Information Interchange
Answer:
d) Indian Standard Code for Information Interchange

Question 64.
BCD is _______bit code.
a) 6
b) 7
c) 8
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 6

Question 65.
EBCDIC is_______ bit code
a) 6
b) 7
c) 8
d) None of these
Answer:
c) 8

Question 66.
ASCII is________ bit code
a) 6
b) 7
c) 8
d) None of these
Answer:
b) 7

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 67.
Unicode is _______ bit code
a) 16
b) 7
c) 8
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 16

Question 68.
ISCII is_______ bit code
a) 16
b) 7
c) 8
d) None of these
Answer:
c) 8

Question 69.
_______coding system is formulated by IBM.
a) BCD
b) EBCDIC
c) ISCII
d) None of these
Answer:
b) EBCDIC

Question 70.
IBM stands for_______
a) Indian Business Machine
b) International Basic Machine
c) International Business Method
d) International Business Machine
Answer:
d) International Business Machine

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 71.
_______is the system of handling the characters of Indian local languages.
a) ASCII
b) Unicode
c) BCD
d) ISCII
Answer:
d) ISCII

Question 72.
ISCII system is formulated fay the _______ in India.
a) Department of Electronics
b) Department of Electricity
c) Department of E-commerce
d) Department of Economics
Answer:
a) Department of Electronics

Question 73.
SCO system can handle___________characterscharacters.
a) 64
b) 128
c) 256
d) 65536
Answer:
a) 64

Question 74.
EBCDIC system can handle _______ characters.
a) 64
b) 128
c) 256
d) None of these
Answer:
c) 256

Question 75.
ASCII system can handle _______characters.
a) 64
b) 128
c) 256
d) None of these
Answer:
c) 256

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 76.
Unicode system can handle _______ characters.
a) 64
b) 128
c) 256
d) 65536
Answer:
d) 65536

Question 77.
ISCII system can handle _______ characters.
a) 64
b) 128
c) 256
d) 65535
Answer:
c) 256

Question 78.
__________ language characters are not represented by ASCII.
a) Tamil
b) Malayalam
c) Telugu and Kannada
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 79.
Tamil, Malayalam, Telugu, and Kannada language characters are represented by _______ code.
a) ASCII
b) Unicode
c) BCD
d) ISCII
Answer:
b) Unicode

Question 80.
_______scheme is denoted by hexadecimal numbers
a) ASCII
b) Unicode
c) BCD
d) ISCII
Answer:
b) Unicode

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 81.
ISCII code was formulated in the year_______
a) 1986 – 88
b) 1984 – 86
c) 1988
d) 1987
Answer:
a) 1986 – 88

Question 82.
_______coding system is integrated with Unicode.
a) ASCII
b) EBCDIC
c) BCD
d) ISCII
Answer:
d) ISCII

Question 83.
_______was generated to handle all the coding system of Universal languages.
a) ASCII
b) Unicode
c) BCD
d) ISCII
Answer:
b) Unicode

Question 84.
The popular coding scheme after ASCII is_______
a) EBCDIC
b) Unicode
c) BCD
d) ISCII
Answer:
b) Unicode

Question 85.
BCD system is_______bit encoding system.
a) 28
b) 216
c) 26
d) 24
Answer:
c) 26

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 86.
EBCDIC system is _______bit encoding system.
a) 28
b) 216
c) 26
d) 27
Answer:
a) 28

Question 87.
ASCII system is a bit encoding system.
a) 28
b) 216
c) 26
d) 27
Answer:
d) 27

Question 88.
Unicode system is _________bit encoding system.
a) 28
b) 216
c) 26
d) 27
Answer:
b) 216

Question 89.
ISCII svstem is _________bit encoding system.
a) 28
b) 216
c) 26
d) 27
Answer:
a) 28

Question 90.
The input code in ASCII can be converted into _________system.
a) EBCDIC
b) Unicode
c) BCD
d) ISCII
Answer:
a) EBCDIC

Question 91.
What is ASCII value for ‘A’ in a decimal number,
a) 97
b) 65
c) 98
d) 32
Answer:
b) 65

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 92.
What is the ASCII value for ‘A’ in a binary number?
a) 01100001
b) 01000001
c) 01100010
d) 00100000
Answer:
b) 01000001

Question 93.
What is the ASCII value for ‘A’ in an octal number?
a) 141
b) 101
c) 142
d) 40
Answer:
b) 101

Question 94.
What is the ASCII value for ‘A’ in hexadecimal numbers?
a) 61
b) 41
c) 62
d) 20
Answer:
b) 41

Question 95.
Find the false statement in the following.
a) Computers can handle positive and negative numbers.
b) MSB is called a sign bit
c) LSB is called a parity bit
d) All the above
Answer:
c) LSB is called a parity bit

Question 96.
Match the following.
a) 78 – (1) Binary number
b) linn – (2) Octal number
c) CAFE – (3) Decimal number
d) 71 – (4) Hexadecimal number

a) 3, 1, 4, 2
b) 4, 3, 2, 1
c) 1, 3, 2, 4
d) 3, 1, 2, 4
Answer:
a) 78 – (1) Binary number

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 97.
In signed magnitude representation,_________ in the sign bit represents negative number.
a) 0
b) 1
c) No symbol
d) None of these
Answer:
b) 1

Question 98.
In signed magnitude representation, __________in the sign bit represents positive number.
a) 0
b) 1
c) No symbol
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 0

Question 99.
The term data comes from the word __________
a) datum
b) date
c) fact
d) None of these
Answer:
a) datum

Part II

Very Short Answers.

Question 1.
What is nibble?
Answer:
Nibble is a collection of 4 bits. A nibble is half a byte.

Question 2.
Define information.
Answer:
Information is a processed fact and obtained from the computer as output. It conveys meaning.

Question 3.
What is radix?
Answer:
The base value of a number is also known as the radix.

Question 4.
Define Bit and Byte.
Answer:
Bit: A bit is the short form of a Binary digit which can be ‘0’ or ‘1’. It is the basic unit of data in computers.
Byte: A collection of 8 bits is called Byte. It is the basic unit of measuring the memory size in the computer.

Question 5.
Expand: BCD, EBCDIC, ASCII
Answer:
BCD – Binary Coded Decimal; EBCDIC – Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code; ASCII – American Standard Code for Information Interchange.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 6.
What are the different types of coding schemes to represent the character sets?
Answer:
The different coding schemes are

  • BCD – Binary Coded Decimal
  • EBCDIC – Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code
  • ASCII – American Standard Code for Information Interchange
  • Unicode
  • ISCII – Indian Standard Code for Information Interchange.

Question 7.
What are the methods of converting a number from decimal to binary?
Answer:

  1. Repeated division by two.
  2. Sum of powers of 2.

Question 8.
What does base or radix mean?
Answer:
Radix or base is the count of a number of digits in each number system. Radix or base is the general idea behind the positional numbering system.

Question 9.
What are the various ways for Binary representation of signed numbers?
Answer:

  1. Signed magnitude representation
  2. 1’s complement
  3. 2’s complement

Question 10.
Write a note on the decimal number system.
Answer:
It consists of 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9(10 digits). It is the oldest and most popular number system used in our day-to-day life. In the positional number system, each decimal digit is weighted relative to its position in the number.
Its base or radix is 10.

Question 11.
Write about the octal number system.
Answer:
Octal number system uses digits 0,1,2,3,4,5,6 and 7 (8 digits). Each octal digit has its own positional value or weight as a power of 8. Its base or radix is 8.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 12.
How will you convert decimal to hexadecimal?
Answer:
To convert Decimal to Hexadecimal, “Repeated division by 16” method can be used) In this method, we have to divide the given number by 16.
Example: Convert (31)10 into its equivalent hexadecimal number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 14

Question 13.
Give the procedure to Octal to Binary.
Answer:
Procedure: For each octal digit in the given number write its 3 digits binary equivalent using positional notation.
Example: Convert (6213)8 to equivalent Binary number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 15

Question 14.
How will you convert Hexadecimal to Binary?
Answer:
Procedure: Write 4 bits Binary equivalent for each Hexadecimal digit for the given number using the positional notation method.
Example:
Convert (8BC)16 into an equivalent Binary number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 16

Question 15.
Write short note on Binary Coded Decimal (BCD).
Answer:
This is 26 bit encoding system. This can handle 26 = 64 characters only. This encoding system is not
in the practice right now.

Question 16.
Write note on EBCDIC encoding system.
Answer:
Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code (EBCDIC) is similar to ASCII Code with 8 bit representation. This coding system is formulated by International Business Machine (IBM). The coding system can handle 256 characters. The input code in ASCII can be converted to EBCDIC system and vice – versa.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 17.
Write a note on the ISCII encoding system.
Answer:
ISCII is the system of handling the character of Indian local languages. This is an 8-bit coding system. Therefore it can handle 256 (28) characters. This system is formulated by the Department of Electronics in India in the year 1986-88 and recognized by the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS). Now, this coding system is integrated with Unicode.

Part III

III. Very Short Answers

Question 1.
Write about the binary number system.
Answer:
There are only two digits in the Binary system, namely, 0 and 1. The numbers in the binary system are represented to the base 2 and the positional multipliers are the powers of 2.
The leftmost bit in the binary number is called the Most Significant Bit (MSB) and it has the largest positional weight. The rightmost bit is the Least Significant Bit (LSB) and has the smallest positional weight.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 17

Question 2.
What is the octal number system?
Answer:
The octal number system uses digits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7 (8 digits): Each octal digit has its own positional value or weight as a power of 8.
Example: The Octal sequence (547)8 has the decimal equivalent:

Question 3.
Give the procedure to convert decimal to octal.
Answer:
To convert Decimal to Octal, “Repeated Division by 8” method can be used) In this method, we have to divide the given number by 8.
Example:
Convert (65)10 into its equivalent Octal number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 18

Question 4.
Give the procedure to convert Octal to Decimal
Answer:
To convert Octal to Decimal, we can use positional notation method)

  • Write down the Octal digits and list the powers of 8 from right to left (Positional Notation).
  • For each positional notation of the digit write the equivalent weight.
  • Multiply each digit with its corresponding weight.
  • Add all the values.

Example:
Convert (1265)8 to equivalent Decimal number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 19

(1265)8 = 512 x 1 + 64 x 2 + 8 x 6 + 1 x 5
= 512 + 128 + 48 + 5
(1265)8 = (693)10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 5.
How will you convert Hexadecimal to Decimal?
Answer:
To convert Hexadecimal to Decimal we can use the positional notation method.

  • Write down the Hexadecimal digits and list the powers of 16 from right to left (Positional Notation)
  • For each positional notation written for the digit, now write the equivalent weight.
  • Multiply each digit with its corresponding weight
  • Add all the values to get one final value.

Example:
Convert (25F)16 into its equivalent Decimal number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 20
(25F)16 = 2 x 256 + 5 x 16 + 15 x 1
= 512 + 80 + 15 (25F)16
= (607)10

Question 6.
Write about binary representation for signed numbers.
Answer:
Computers can handle both positive (unsigned) and negative (signed) numbers. The simplest method to represent negative binary numbers is called Signed Magnitude. In signed magnitude method, the leftmost bit is the Most Significant Bit (MSB), which is called the sign bit or parity bit.
The numbers are represented in computers in different ways:

  • Signed Magnitude representation
  • 1’s Complement
  • 2’s Complement

Question 7.
Explain ASCII code in detail.
Answer:
This is the most popular encoding system recognized by the United States. Most of the computers use this system. Remember this encoding system can handle English characters only. This can handle 27 bit which means 128 characters.

In this system, each character has an individual number. The new edition ASCII -8, has 28 bits and can handle 256 characters are represented from 0 to 255 unique numbers.

The ASCII code equivalent to the uppercase letter ‘A’ is 65. The binary representation of the ASCII (7 bit) value is 1000001. Also 01000001 in ASCII-8 bit.

Question 8.
Explain Unicode in detail.
Answer:
This coding system is used in most modern computers. The popular coding scheme after ASCII is Unicode. ASCII can represent only 256 characters. Therefore English and European Languages alone can be handled by ASCII. Particularly there was a situation when the languages like Tamil, Malayalam, Kannada, and Telugu could not be represented by ASCII.

Hence, Unicode was generated to handle all the coding system of Universal languages. This is a 16-bit code and can handle 65536 characters. The unicode scheme is denoted by hexadecimal numbers.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Part IV

IV. Detail Answers.

Question 1.
Explain decimal to binary conversion using Repeated Division by 2 methods.
Answer:
To convert Decimal to Binary “Repeated Division by 2” method can be used. Any Decimal number divided by 2 will leave a remainder of 0 or 1. Repeated division by 2 will leave a sequence of 0s and Is that become the binary equivalent of the decimal number.

Suppose it is required to convert the decimal number N into binary form, dividing N by 2 in the decimal system, we will obtain a quotient N1 and a remainder Rl, where R1 can have a value of either 0 or 1. The process is repeated until the quotient becomes 0 or 1. When the quotient is ‘0’ or ‘1’, it is the final remainder value. Write the final answer starting from the final remainder value obtained to the first remainder value obtained.

Example:
Convert (65)10 into its equivalent binary number
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 21

Question 2.
Explain decimal to binary conversion using Sum of powers of 2 methods.
Answer:
A decimal number can be converted into a binary number by adding up the powers of 2 and then adding bits as needed to obtain the total value of the number.
a) Find the largest power of 2 that is smaller than or equal to 65.
6510 > 6410

b) Set the 64’s bit to 1 and subtract 64 from the original number
65 – 64 = 1

c) 32 is greater than the remaining total.
Therefore, set the 32’s bit to 0.

d) 16 is greater than the remaining total.
Therefore, set the 16’s bit to 0
.
e) 8 is greater than the remaining total.
Therefore, set the 8’s bit to 0.

f) 4 is greater than the remaining total.
Therefore, set the 4’s bit to 0.

g) 2 is greater than the remaining total.
Therefore, set the 2’s bit to 0.

h) As the remaining value is equivalent to l’s bit, set it to 1.
1 – 1 = 0
Conversion is complete 6510 = (1000001)2

Example:
The conversion steps can be given as follows:
Given Number: 65
Equivalent or value less than the power of 2 is: 64
(1) 65 – 64 = 1
(2) 1 – 1= 0
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 22
6510 = (1000001)2.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 3.
Explain the procedure to convert fractional decimal to Binary.
Answer:
The method of repeated multiplication by 2
has to be used to convert such kind of decimal fractions.
The steps involved in the method of repeated multiplication by 2:

Step 1: Multiply the decimal fraction by 2 and note the integer part. The integer part is either 0 or 1.
Step 2: Discard the integer part of the previous product. Multiply the fractional part of the previous product by 2. Repeat Step 1 until the same fraction repeats or terminates (0).
Step 3: The resulting integer part forms a sequence of Os and Is that becomes the binary equivalent of a decimal fraction.
Step 4: The final answer is to be written from the first integer part obtained till the last integer part obtained.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 23
Write the integer parts from top to bottom to obtain the equivalent fractional binary number. Hence (0.2)10= (0.00110011…)2 = 0.00110011)2

Question 4.
How will you convert Binary to Decimal?
Answer:
To convert Binary to Decimal we can use the positional notation method.
Step 1: Write down the Binary digits and list the powers of 2 from right to left (Positional Notation)
Step 2: For each positional notation written for the digit, now write the equivalent weight.
Step 3; Multiply each digit with its corresponding weight
Step 4: Add all the values.

Example:
Convert (111011)2 into its equivalent decimal number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 24
32 + 16 + 8 + 0 + 2 + 1 = (59)10
(111011)2 = (59)10

Question 5.
How will you convert Binary to Octal?
Answer:
Step 1.: Group the given binary number into 3 bits from right to left.
Step 2: You can add preceding O to make a group of 3 bits if the leftmost group has less than 3 bits.
Step 3: Convert equivalent octal value using “2’s power positional weight method”

Example
Convert (11010110)2 into an octal equivalent number

Step 1: Group the given number into 3 bits from right to left.
011 010 110
The left-most groups have less than 3 bits, so 0 is added to its left to make a group of 3 bits.

Step-2: Find the Octal equivalent of each group.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 25

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 6.
Give the procedure to convert Binary to Hexadecimal.
Answer:
Step 1: Group the given number into 4 bits from right to left.
Step 2: You can add preceding 0’s to make a group of 4 bits if the leftmost group has less than 4 bits.
Step 3: Convert equivalent Hexadecimal value using “2’s power positional weight method”.

Example
Convert (1111010110)2 into Hexadecimal number
Step 1: Group the given number into 4 bits from right to left. 1
0011 1101 0110
0’s are added to the leftmost group to make it a group of 4 bits.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 26

Question 7.
Give the procedure to convert fractional Binary to Decimal equivalent.
Answer:
The steps to convert fractional Binary number to its decimal equivalent:
Step 1 : Convert an integral part of Binary to Decimal equivalent using positional notation method.
Step 2 : To convert the fractional part of binary to its decimal equivalent.
Step 2,1 : Write down the Binary digits in the fractional part.
Step 2,2 : For all the digits write powers of 2 from left to right starting
from 2-1, 2-2, 2-3 2-n, now write the equivalent weight.
Step 2.3 : Multiply each digit with its corresponding weight.
Step 2.4 : Add all the values which you obtained in Step 2.3.

Step 3 : To get final answer write the integral
part (after conversion), followed by a decimal point(.) and the answer arrived at Step 2.4

Example:
Convert the given Binary number (11.011)2 into its decimal equivalent Integer part (11)2 = 3
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 27

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 8.
Explain the method of representing signed binary numbers in the Signed Magnitude representation.
Answer:
The value of the whole numbers can be determined by the sign used before it. If the number has a ‘+’ sign or no sign it will be considered as positive. If the number has signed it will be considered negative.

Example:
+ 43 or 43 is a positive number
– 43 is a negative number

In signed binary representation, the leftmost bit is considered as a sign bit. If this bit is 0, it is a positive number and if it 1, it is a negative number. Therefore a signed binary number has 8 bits, only 7 bits used for storing values (magnitude), and 1 bit is used for signs.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 28

Question 9.
Explain the method of representing signed binary numbers in l’s complement representation.
Answer:
This is an easier approach to represent signed numbers. This is for negative numbers only i.e. the number whose MSB is 1.

The steps to be followed to find l’s complement of a number:

Step 1: Convert given Decimal number into Binary
Step 2: Check if the binary number contains 8 bits, if less add 0 at the left most bit, to make it as 8 bits.
Step 3: Invert all bits (i.e. Change 1 as 0 and 0 as 1)

Example: Find 1’s complement for (-24)10
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 29

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 10.
Explain the method of representing signed binary numbers in 2’s complement representation.
Answer:
The 2’s-complement method for the negative number is as follows:
a) Invert all the bits in the binary sequence (i.e., change every 0 to 1 and every 1 to 0 ie.,l’s complement)
b) Add 1 to the result to the Least Significant Bit (LSB).
Example: 2’s Complement represent of (-24)10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 30

Question 11.
Explain binary addition with a suitable example.
Answer:
The following table is useful when adding two binary numbers.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 31
In 1 + 1 = 10, is considered as sum 0 and the 1 as carry bit. This carry bit is added with the previous position of the bit pattern.
Example: Add: 10112 + 10012
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 32

Example: Perform Binary addition for the following:
2310 + 1210
Step 1: Convert 23 and 12 into binary form
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 33

Step 2: Binary addition of 23 and 12:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 34

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 11.
Explain binary subtraction with a suitable example.
Answer:
The table for Binary Subtraction is as follows:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 35

When subtracting 1 from 0, borrow 1 from the next Most Significant Bit, when borrowing from the next Most Significant Bit, if it is 1, replace it with 0. If the next Most Significant Bit is 0, you must borrow from a more significant bit that contains 1 and replace it with 0 and 0s upto that point become Is.
Example : Subtract 10010102 — 101002.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 36
Example: Perform Binary addition for the
following:
(-21)10 + (5)10
Step 1: Change -21 and 5 into binary form
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 37 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 38

Workshop

Question 1.
Identify the number system for the following numbers.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 39

Question 2.
State whether the following numbers are valid or not. If invalid, give a reason.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 40

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 3.
Convert the following Decimal numbers to their equivalent Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal.
i) 1920
ii) 255
iii) 126
Answer:
i) 1920
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 41

ii) 255
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 42

iii) 126
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 43

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 4.
Convert the given Binary number into its equivalent Decimal, Octal, and Hexadecimal numbers.
i)101110101
ii) 1011010
iii) 101011111
Answer:
i) 101110101
Binary to Decimal (Multiply by positional value and then add)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 44

ii) 1011010
Binary to decimal
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 45 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 46

iii) 101011111
Binary to decimal
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 47

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 5.
Convert the following Octal numbers into Binary numbers.
a) 472
b) 145
c) 347
d) 6247
e) 645
Answer:
Procedure: Write three digits binary number for every octal digit that will give the equivalent binary number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 48
Ans.
(472)8 = (100111010)2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 49
Answer:
(145)8 = (001100101)2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 50
Answer:
(347)8 = (011100111)2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 51
Answer:
(6247)8 = (110010100111)2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 52
Answer:
(645)8 = (110100101)2.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 6.
Convert the following Hexadecimal numbers to Binary numbers
a) A6
b) BE
c) 9BC8
d) BC9
Answer:
Procedure: Write four digits binary number for every Hexadecimal digit that will give the equivalent binary number.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 53
Answer:
(A6)16 = (10100110)2.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 54
Answer:
(BE)16 = (1011 1110)2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 55
Answer:
(9BC8)16 = (1001101111001000)2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 56
Answer:
(BC9)16 = (101111001001)2

Question 7.
Write the l’s complement number and 2’s complement number for the following decimal numbers:
Perform the following binary computations:
a) -22
b) -13
c) -65
d) -46
Answer:
a) -22
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 57

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 58
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 59

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems

Question 8.
a) 1010 + 1510
b) – 1210 + 510
c) 1410 – 1210
d) (-2)10 – (-6)10
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 60
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 61
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 2 Number Systems 62

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

11th Computer Science Guide Iteration and Recursion Text Book Questions and Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Part I

Choose The Correct Answer :

Question 1.
A loop invariant need not be true.
a) at the start of the loop
b) at the start of each iteration
c) at the end of each iteration
d) at the start of the algorithm
Answer:
d) at the start of the algorithm

Question 2.
We wish to cover a chessboard with dominoes, I I 1 the number of black squares andSamacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 1 the number of white squares covered by dominoes, respectively, placing a domino can be modeled by
a) b ; = b + 2
b) w := w + 2
c) b, w : = b + 1, w + 1
d) b : = w
Answer:
d) b : = w

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 3.
If m x a + n x b is an invariant for the assignment a, b : -a + 8, b + 7, the values of m and n are
a) m = 8, n = 7
b) m – 1, n = -8
c) m = 7, n = 8
d) m – 8, n = -7
Answer:
b) m – 1, n = -8

Question 4.
Which of the following is not an invariant of the assignment? m, n ; = m + 2, n + 3.
a) m mod 2
b) n mod 3
c) 3 x m – 2 x n
d) 2 x m – 3 x n
Answer:
d) 2 x m – 3 x n

Question 5.
If Fibonacci number is defined recursively as
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 2
to evaluate F(4), how many times F( ) is applied?
a) 3
b) 4
c) 8
d) 9
Answer:
a) 3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 6.
Using this recursive definition
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 3
how many multiplications are needed to calculate a10?
a) 11
b) 10
c) 9
d) 8
Answer:
c) 9

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is an invariant?
Answer:
An expression involving variables, which remain unchanged by an assignment to one of these variables is called an invariant of the assignment.

Question 2.
Define a loop invariant.
Answer:
Each time the loop body is executed, the variables which remains unchanged by the execution of the loop body is called the loop invariant.

Question 3.
Does testing the loop condition affect the loop invariant? Why?
Answer:
No, the loop condition does not affect the loop invariant. Because the loop invariant is true at four points.

  1. At the start of the loop.
  2. At the start of each iteration.
  3. At the end of each iteration.
  4. At the end of the loop.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 4.
What is the relationship between loop invariant, loop condition, and the input-output recursively?
Answer:

  • Establish the loop invariant at the start of the loop.
  • The loop body should so update the variables as to progress toward the end and maintain the loop invariant, at the same time.
  • When the loop ends, the termination condition and the loop invariant should establish the input-output relation.

Question 5.
What is recursive problem-solving?
Answer:
Recursion is a method of solving problems that involves breaking a problem down into smaller and smaller subproblems until the user gets into a small problem that can be solved trivially. Usually, recursion involves a function calling itself. While it may not seem like much on the surface, recursion allows us to write elegant solutions to problems that may otherwise be very difficult to program.

Question 6.
Define factorial of a natural number recursively.
Answer:
factoriai(n)
— inputs: n
— outputs: f
if n = 0
f = 1
else
f = n x factorial(n -1) → Recursive process
Example:
To calculate 5 factorial factorial(5)
= 5 x factorial(4)
= 5 x 4 x factorial(3)
= 5 x 4 x 3 x factorial(2)
= 5 x 4 x 3 x 2 x factorial (1) =5 x 4 x 3 x 2 x 1 = 120

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Part – III

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
There are 7 tumblers on a table, all standing upside down. You are allowed to turn any 2 tumblers simultaneously in one move. Is it possible to reach a situation when all the tumblers are right side up? (Hint: The parity of the number of upside-down tumblers is invariant).
Solution:
Let u – No. of tumblers right side up
v – No. of tumblers upside down
Initial stage : u = 0, v = 7 (All tumblers upside down)
Final stage output: u = 7, v = 0 (All tumblers right side up)

Possible Iterations:
(i) Turning both up side down tumblers to right side up
u = u + 2, v = v – 2 [u is even]

(ii) Turning both right side up tumblers to upside down.
u = u – 2, v = v + 2 [u is even]

(iii) Turning one right side up tumblers to upside down and other tumblers from upside down to right side up.
u = u + 1 – 1 = u, v = v + 1 – 1 = v [u is even]

Initially u = 0 and continues to be even in all three cases. Therefore u is always even. Invariant: u is even (i. e. No. of right side up tumblers are always even)
But in the final stage (Goal), u = 7 and v = 0 i. e. u is odd.
Therefore it is not possible to reach a situation where all the tumblers are right side up.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 2.
A knockout tournament is a series of games. Two players compete in each game; the loser is knocked out (i.e. does not play anymore), the winner carries on. The winner of the tournament is the player that is left after all other players have been knocked out. Suppose there are 1234 players in a tournament. How many games are played before the tournament winner is decided?
Solution :
Suppose there are 2 players A and B competing in a knockout match, so the number of possible matches is – A Vs B
The answer is Only One.
Suppose there are 3 players A, B and C competing in a knockout match, so the Number of possible matches is – 2.
A Vs B , and A/B( Whoever wins with plays with C) vs C.
Suppose there are 4 players A, B, C & D competing in a knockout match, so the Number of possible matches is – 3.
A Vs B , C Vs D A/B Vs C/D
Thus the General Observations is –
When there are 2 players – 1 Match
When there are 3 players – 2 Matches
When there are 4 players – 3 Matches
When there are n players – ( n – 1) Matches
Hence when there are 1234 players there will be 1233 matches.
The number of games in a single-elimination tournament is always 1 less than the number of players/teams.

Question 3.
King Vikramaditya has two magic swords. With one, he can cut off 19 heads of a dragon, but after that, the dragon grows 13 heads. With the other sword, he can cut off 7 heads, but 22 new heads grow. If all heads are cut off, the dragon dies. If the dragon has originally 1000 heads, can it ever die? (Hint: The number of heads mod 3 is invariant.)
Answer:
No. of heads of dragon = 1000
sword 1: cuts 19 heads but 13 heads grow back.
sword 2: cuts 7 heads but 22 heads grow back.
Let n be the number of heads of the dragon at the initial state.

Case 1: King uses Sword 1
Sword 1 cuts off 19 heads but 13 heads grow back.
n : = n – 19 + 13 = n – 6 No. of heads are reduced by 6.

Case 2: King uses Sword 2
Sword 2 cuts 7 heads but 22 heads grow back.
n : = n – 7 + 22 = n + 15
No. of heads are increased by 15.

Note:
In the above two cases, either 6 heads are removed or 15 heads added. Both 6 and 15 are multiples of 3.
Therefore repeating case 1 and case 2 recursively will either reduce or increase dragon heads in multiples of 3.
That is invariant is n mod 3.
If n mod 3 = 0 then there is a possibility that the dragon dies.
But 1000 is not a multiple of 3 1000 mod 3 = 1 ≠ 0
It is not possible to kill the dragon. The dragon never dies.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Part IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Assume an 8 x 8 chessboard with the usual coloring. “Recoloring” operation changes the color of all squares of a row or a column. You can recolor repeatedly. The goal is to attain just one black square. Show that you cannot achieve the goal. (Hint: If a row or column has b black squares, it changes by (|8 – b) – b |).
Solution:
Let us start with a normal coloured chessboard, with a number of black squares B=32 and the number of white squares W=32.
So W – B = 0, which is divisible by 4 and W + B = 64.
W-B = 0 mod 4

Whenever we change the colours of a row or column, we change the colour of 8 squares. Let this row (or column) have w white squares + b black squares w + b = 8 squares.

If this operation B increases (or decreases) by 2n, then W decreases (or increases) by 2n so that W + B = 64, but B – W will change by 4n and it will remain divisible by 4.
W – B = 0 mod 4

After every operation, “B – W mod 4” can have no other values.
But the required state has 63 white squares and 1 black square, so it requires
W-B = 63-1 = 62 = 2 mod 4 which is impossible.

Question 2.
Power can also be defined recursively as
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 4
Construct a recursive algorithm using this definition. How many multiplications are needed to calculate a10?
Recursive Algorithm
power(a,n)
— inputs: n is an integer, n ≥ 0
— outputs: an
if n = 0 → Base case
1
else
if(n%2 = 0)
a x power(a, an-1) → Recursion step for odd number else
a x power(an/2 x an/2) → → Recursion step for even number

To calculate a10
power(a, 10)
= a x power(a5 x a5)
= a x power(a, a4) x power(a, a4)
= a x a x power(a2 x a2) x power(a, a4)
= a x a x a x power(a, a0) x power(a, a0 ) x
power(a, a4)
= a x a x a x a x a x power(a2 x a2)
= a x a x a x a x a x a x a x power(a, a0) x a x power(a, a0)
=a x a x a x a x a x a x a x a x a x a
There are nine multiplications are needed.

Question 3.
A single-square-covered board is a board of 2n x 2n squares in which one square is covered with a single square tile. Show that it is possible to cover this board with triominoes without overlap.
Solution :
A triamine is an L-shaped tile formed with three adjacent squares.
Corner-covered board and triamine
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 5 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 6

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Cover the corner-covered board with the L-shaped triominoes without overlap, Triominoes can be rotated as needed.
The size of the problem is n (board of size 2n x 2n). We can solve the problem by recursion. The base case is n = 1. It is a 2 x 2 corner-covered board. We can cover it with one triamine and solve the problem.

In the recursion step, divide the corner-covered board of size 2n x 2n into 4 sub-boards, each of size 2n-1 x 2n-1, by drawing horizontal and vertical lines through the center of the board. Place a triamine at the center of the entire board so as to not cover the corner-covered sub-board, as shown in the left-most board of the given figure below. Now, we have four corner-covered boards, each of size 2n-1 x 2n-1.
Recursive process of covering a corner-covered board of size 2 x 23
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 7
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 8

We have 4 sub-problems whose size is strictly smaller than the size of the given problem. We can solve each of the sub-problems recursively. tile corner_covered board of size n
if n = 1 — base case
cover the 3 squares with one triominoe
else — recursion step
divide board into 4 sub_boards of size n – 1
place a triominoe at centre of the board
leaving out the corner_covered sub-board
tile each sub-board of size n-1

The resulting recursive process for covering a 23 x 23 corner-covered board is illustrated in the above Figure.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

11th Computer Science Guide Iteration and Recursion Additional Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose The Correct Answer:

Question 1.
………………… is an algorithm design technique, closely related to induction.
(a) Iteration
(b) Invariant
(c) Loop invariant
(d) Recursion
Answer:
(d) Recursion

Question 2.
Each time the loop body is executed, the variables are _________
a) updated
b) unchanged
c) neither A nor B
d) destroyed
Answer:
a) updated

Question 3.
In a loop, if L is an invariant of the loop body B, then L is known as a …………………
(a) recursion
(b) variant
(c) loop invariant
(d) algorithm
Answer:
(c) loop invariant

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 4.
_________ is more powerful than the iteration.
a) Recursion
b) Specification
c) Composition
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Recursion

Question 5.
The unchanged variables of the loop body are…………………
(a) loop invariant
(b) loop variant
(c) condition
(d) loop variable
Answer:
(a) loop invariant

Question 6.
_________ is a recursive solver case.
a) Base case
b) Recursion steps
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 7.
If L is a loop variant, then it should be true at ………………… important points in the algorithm.
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(c) 4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 8.
In_________, the size of moot to a sub-problem must be strictly smaller than the size of the given input.
a) Recursion
b) Specification
c) Composition
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Recursion

Question 9.
In an expression, if the variables have the same value before and after an assignment, then it is of an assignment.
(a) variant
(b) Invariant
(c) iteration
(d) variable
Answer:
(b) Invariant

Question 10.
An expression involving variables, which remains unchanged by an assignment to one of these variables, is called _________ of the assignment.
a) an invariant
b) variant
c) neither A nor B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) an invariant

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 11.
When the solver calls a sub solver, then it is called …………………
(a) Iterative call
(b) solver call
(c) recursive call
(d) conditional call
Answer:
(c) recursive call

Question 12.
_________ Is an algorithm design technique
to execute the same action repeatedly.
a) iteration
b) recursion
c) Both iteration and recursion
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both iteration and recursion

Question 13.
Which of the following is updated when each time the loop body is executed?
(a) data type
(b) subprogram
(c) function
(d) variable
Answer:
(d) variable

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 14.
Recursion is an algorithm design technique, closely related to _________
a) induction
b) introduction
c) intuition
d) None of these
Answer:
a) induction

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
When the loop variant will be true?
Answer:
The loop invariant is true before the loop body and after the loop body, each time.

Question 2.
How problems are solved using recursion?
Answer:
Using recursion, we solve a problem with a given input, by solving the same problem with a part of the input and constructing a solution to the original problem from the solution to the partial input.

Question 3.
If L is a loop variant, then where it is true in the algorithm?
Answer:
It is true in the following four points of an algorithm.

  1. at the start of the loop.
  2. at the start of each iteration.
  3. at the end of each iteration.
  4. at the end of the loop.

Part – III

Explain In Brief

Question 1.
Write a note on Recursion.
Answer:
Recursion:
Recursion is another algorithm design technique, closely related to iteration, but more powerful. Using recursion, we solve a problem with a given input, by solving the same problem with a part of the input and constructing a solution to the original problem from the solution to the partial input.

Question 2.
Write the recursive algorithm for the length of a sequence.
Answer:
The recursive algorithm for the length of a sequence
can be written as
length (s)
— inputs: s
— outputs : length of s
if s has one customer — base case
1
else
1 + length(tail(s)) — recursion step.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Part IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Explain loop Invariant in detail.
Answer:
In a loop, if L is an invariant of the loop body B, then L is known as a loop invariant,
while C
— L
B
— L
The loop invariant is true before the loop body and after the loop body, each time. Since L is true at the start of the first iteration, L is true

at the start of the loop also (just before the loop). Since L Is true at the end of the last iteration, L is true when the loop ends also (just after the loop). Thus, if L is a loop variant, then it is true at four important points in the algorithm, as annotated in the algorithm and shown in Figure 3.1.

i) at the start of the loop (just before the loop)
ii) at the start of each iteration (before loop body)
iii) at the end of each iteration (after loop body)
iv) at the end of the loop (just after the loop)

i) — L, start of loop
while
C

ii) — L, start of iteration
B

iii) –L, end of Iteration

iv) — L, end of loop

The points where the loop invariant is true
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 9

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 2.
Design an iterative algorithm to compute an.
Answer:
Let us name the algorithm power(a, n).
For example,
power(10, 4) = 10000
power (5,3) = 125 .
power (2,5) = 32
Algorithm power(a, n) computes an by multiplying a cumulatively n times.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 10
The specification and the loop invariant are shown as comments.

power (a, n)
— inputs: n is a positive integer
— outputs: p = an
p, i := 1,0
while i ≠ n
— loop invariant: p = ai
p, i: = p x a, i + 1
The step by step execution of power (2, 5) is shown in the following Table
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Iteration and Recursion

Question 3.
Explain the outline of the recursive problem-solving technique.
Answer:
The outline of the recursive problem-solving technique is shown below.

solver (input)
if the input is small enough
construct solution
else
find sub_problems of reduced input
solutions to sub_problems = solver for each sub_problem
construct a solution to the problem from
solutions to the sub_problems

Whenever we solve a problem using recursion, we have to ensure these two cases: In the recursion step, the size of the input to the recursive call is strictly smaller than the size of the given input, and there is at least one base case.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Guide Pdf Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Solutions Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

11th Bio Botany Guide Taxonomy and Systematic BotanyText Book Back Questions and Answers

Part – A

Choose the right answer:

Question 1.
Specimen derived from non-original collection serves as the nominclatural type, when original specimen is missing it is known as
a) Holotype
b) Neotype
c) Isotype
d) Paratype
Answer:
b) Neotype

Question 2.
Phylogenilic classification is the most favoured classification because it reflects,
a) Comparative anatomy
b) Number of flowers produced
c) Comparative cytology
d) Evolutionary relationships
Answer:
d) Evolutionary relationships

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 3.
The taxonomy which involves the similarities and dissimilarities among the immune system of different taxa is termed as
a) Chemotaxonomy
b) Molecular systematics
c) Sero taxonomy
d) Numerical taxonomy
Answer:
c) Sero taxonomy

Question 4.
Which of the following is not a flowering plant with root nodules containing filamentous nitrogen-fixing micro-organisms?
a) Crotalaria juncea
b) Cycas revoluta
c) Cice rarietinum
d) Casuarina equisetifolia
Answer:
b) Cycas revoluta

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 5.
Flowers are weakly zygomorphic in
a) Cerapegia
b) Thevelia
c) Datura
d) Solanum
Answer:
c) Datura

Two marks

Question 1.
What is the role of national gardens in conserving biodiversity
Answer:
Botanical Gardens play the following important roles.

  1. Gardens with an aesthetic value attract a large number of visitors. For example, the Great Banyan Tree (Ficus benghalensis) in the Indian Botanical Garden at Kolkata
  2. Gardens have a wide range of species and supply taxonomic material for botanical research.
  3. Garden is used for self-instruction or demonstration purposes.

Question 2.
Where will you place the plants which contain two cotyledons with cup-shaped thalamus
Answer:

  1. Two cotyledonous plants are kept under Dicotyledonou
  2. Cup-shaped thalamus is a unique feature of the series Thalamiflorae of subclass

Polypetalae:

  • Class
  • Dicot
  • Subclass
  • Polypetalae
  • Series
  • Thalamiflorae

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 3.
How do molecular markers work to unlock the evolutionary history of organisms?
Answer:
Molecular taxonomy using molecular markers like RAPD’s etc helps in establishing the relationship between the members of different taxonomic groups at the DNA level. Thus it helps to unlock the evolutionary history of organisms.

Question 4.
Give the F.D of Clutoria ternalia
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 1
Question 5.
How will you distinguish Solanaceae members from Liliaceae members.
Answer:

JSolanaceae (Dicot) Morphology

Liliaceae (Monocot) Morphology

Bulbous stem / rhizome / corm absent but stem tuber present eg. Solarium tuberosumBulbous Stem – Lilium
Rhizome -Polygonatum
Corm – Colchicum Occur
Radical leaves Cariscup } Absent from rootsRadical leaves present eg. Lilium
Leaves alternate & exstipulateSlipules absent exstipulate fleshy and hollow
Flowers – PentamerousFlowers – Trimerous
Calyx_ – Persistent -Solanum melongenaCalyx , Corolla – Absent
Corolla of various shapes presentPerranth is only present
Stamens – 5 – EpipetalousStamens – 6 – In a whorl of three each apostamenous
Carpels:

  1. Ovary superior
  2. bicarpellary, bilocular

Carpels oblipuely placed bicarpellary later become tetra carpellary due to the formation of false septa

Ovary superior tricarpellary trilocular
Fruits – Berry / capsuleFruits – Loculierdal capsula
Anatomy:
Bi-collateral Vascular Bundles occur
Cambium present Secondary growth present
Anatomy:
Conjoint collateral Vascular bundles
Cambium absent
No secondary growth

Part – B

11th Bio Botany Guide Taxonomy and Systematic Botany Additional Important Questions and Answers

Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
Who is called the father of Botany?
(a) Linnaeus
(b) Theophrastus
(c) Darwin
(d) Thales
Answer:
(b) Theophrastus

Question 2.
The latest ICBN was held at
a) Cambridge – England
b) Leningrad – Russia
c) Shenzhen – China
d) Rio-de genero – America
Answer:
cl Shenzhen China

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 3.
Who proposed the concept of “idos” or species?
(a) Theophrastus
(b) Stebbins
(c) Darwin
(d) Plato
Answer:
(d) Plato

Question 4.
The floral of Tamil Nadu Carnatic by K.M. Mathew (1983) and Flora of Madras Presidency by J.S Gamble and Fischer belong to
a) Monograph
b) Catalogue
c) Flora
d) Regional flora
Answer:
d) Regional flora

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 5.
Who first proposed the early elementary rule of naming plants?
(a) A.P.de Candolle
(b) Linnaeus
(c) Alphonse de Candolle
(d) Simpson
Answer:
(b) Linnaeus

Question 6.
Botanical Garden of New South Wales is located at
a) Brazil
b) New York
c) Sydney
d) Rio de Janeiro
Answer:
c) Sydney

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 7.
18th International Botanical congress was held at …………….
(a) Sydney
(b) Leningrad
(c) Melbourne
(d) London
Answer:
(c) Melbourne

Question 8.
Plants with incomplete flowers either a petalous or with undifferentiated calyx and corolla are placed under the sub class
a) Heterornerae
b) Monochlarnydeae
c) Bicarpellatae
d) Monocotyledonae
Answer:
b) Monochlamvdeae

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 9.
Adolph Engler and Karl – A – Prantl are
a) Americal taxonomists
b) French taxonomists
c) Chinese taxonomists
d) German taxonomists
Answer:
d) German taxonomists

Question 10.
…………… is a descriptive phrase of a plant.
(a) Vernacular name
(b) Binomial
(c) Polynomial
(d) Botanical name
Answer:
(c) Polynomial

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 11.
The fruit is geocarpic in
a) Vigna radiate
b) Cablab purpuris
c) Araehis hypogea
d) Cicer arietinum
Answer:
c) Arachis hypogea

Question 12.
The term biosystematics was introduced by
a) Chrispeels and Gartner
b) Camp and Gilly
c) Engler and Prantl
d) Bentham and Hooker
Answer:
b) Camp and Gilly

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 13.
…………… are the tools for identifying unfamiliar plants.
(a) Flora
(b) Keys
(c) Monograph
(d) Catalogues
Answer:
(b) Keys

Question 14.
Most of the seeds are reniform in
a) Fabaceae
b) Solanaceae
c) Asteraceae
d) Liliaceae
Answer:
a) Fabaceae

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 15.
Plants with incomplete flowers either petalous or with undifferentiated calyx and corolla are placed under
a) Monocotyledonae
b) Polypetalae
c) Monochlamydeae
d) Gamopetalae
Answer:
c) Monochlamydeae

Question 16.
First modern botanical garden was established by …………… .
(a) Theophrastus
(b) Linnaeus
(c) Luca Ghini
(d) Stebbins
Answer:
(c) Luca Ghini

Question 17.
Phenology is the study
a) Pollen grains structure
b) Development of gametes
c) Study of climate and weather on plants
d) Study of functional aspects of plants
Answer:
c) Study of climate and weather on plants

Question 18
Tephrosia purpurea, Indigofera tinctoria are plants used as
a) Biofuel or bioenergy
b) Bio manure
c) Biomedicine
d) Biopesticides
Answer:
b) Bio manure.

Question 19.
Carpels are obliquely placed in the family
a) Fabaceae
b) Solanaceae
C) Liliaceae
d) Malvaceae
Answer:
b) Solanaceae

Question 20.
Which series includes epigynous flowers with an inferior ovary?
(a) Heteromerae
(b) Disaflorea
(c) Inferae
(d) Thalanifloreae
Answer:
(c) Inferae

II. Fill up the blanks in the given Tabulation

Question 1.
Name of the Taxonomist BOOK No. of plants

Name of the Taxonomist

BOOK

No. of plants

i. Theophrastus (372 – 287 BC)De Historia Pfcntarum………………….
ii. ……………….Materia Medica600 plants
iii. Carolus LinnaeusSpecies Plantarum………….
iv. ………………3 volumes of Genera Plantarum97205 species (202 families)

Answer:
i. 500 Plants
ii. Discoredes (62 – 127 AD)
iii. 7300 Species
iv. Bentham & Hooker

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 2.

Taxon

Definition

Example

i. FamilyComprises a no of genera which share some similarities…………………..
ii. …………………Group of families shows fewer similarities among themselvesMalvales
iii. ClassGroup of order which share few similarities…………………..
iv. ………………….Number of classesMagnoliophyta

Answer:
(i) Asteraceae
(ii) order
(iii) Asteropsida
(iv) Sub – Division

Question 3.

Name of the IBC

Place

Year

i. 5th International Botanical Congress………………………..1930
ii. 12th International Botanical CongressLeningrad – Russia…………………..
iii. 18th International Botanical Congress……………………..2011
iv. …………………Shenzhen – China2017

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 2

Answer:
b) Cambridge – England 1975 Melbourne Australia 19th I BC

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

III. Find out the correct statement.

Question 1.
Find out the Correct Statements the given below.
a) Scientific Names are treated as Latin regardless of their derivation
b) Cryptogams include non-flowering plants
c) Linnaeus system of classification is known as the Natural system of classification
d) According to APG IV Monocots contain 10 orders and 37 families
(I) a & b
(II) b & c
(III) c & d
(IV) a & d
Answer:
(I) a & b

Question 2.
Find out the correct statements from the given below
a) Botanical name of chilly – Capsicum esculentum
b) Ashwagandha is also known as Amukkura
c) An alkaloid colchicine is got from Colchicum luteum
d) Glycine max is the botanical name of the Soya bean
(I) a & b
(II) b & d
(III) a & c
(IV) c & d
Answer:
(II) b & d

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

IV. Assertion and reason

Question 1.
Assertion: Classification is essential in biology because there is a vast diversity of organisms to sort out and compare
Reason: Unless they are organized into manageable Categories, It will be difficult for the identification
(A) Assertion and Reason correct. The reason is explaining Assertion
(B) Assertion and Reason are correct but Reason not explaining Assertion
(C) Assertion is true, but Reason is wrong
(D) Assertion is true, but Reason is not explaining Assertion
Answer:
a – Assertion and Reason correct. Reason is explaining Assertion

Question 2.
Assertion: Cronquist system of classification could not persist for a long time.
Reason: The system is not very useful for identification and cannot be adopted in herbaria.
Answer:
d) Assertion ‘A’ is true Reason ‘R’ is not explaining Assertion

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 3.
Assertion : Monograph is a complete global account of a faxon of any rank family genus or species at a given time
Reason : It has books of libraries rich in botanical litles.
Answer:
d) Assertion correct but Reason not explaining Assertion

Question 4.
Assertion A: Chemotaxonomy is the scientific approach to the classification of plants on the basis of their biochemical constituents
Reason R: Proteins, amino acids, nucleic acids, and peptides, etc are the most studied chemicals in chemotaxonomy
Answer:
a) Assertion and Reason ‘R’ correct Reason is explaining Assertion

V. Match the following and find the correct

Question 1
Name of Herbarium No. of specimens
i) Presidency college Herbarium – Chennai – A. 4,08,776
ii) Central National Herbarium – Calcutta – B. 30,500
iii) Madras Herbarium – Coimbatore – C. 15,000
iv) Jawaharlal Nehru Tropical Botanical Garden – D. 2,00,000
and Reserach Institute Trivandrum
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 3
Answer:
a) C D A B

Question 2.
Botanical Name Common Name
(I) Glycirrhiza glabra A. Thanneer Muttan
(II) Withania somnifera B. Athimaduram
(III) Asperagus racemosus C. Senkandal
(IV) Gloriosa superba D. Amukkara
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 4
Answer:
a) B D A C

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

VI. Choose the wrong answer

Question 1.
(i) Karyology – Study of Chromosomes
(ii) Palynology – Study of Pollen
(iii) Serology – Study of Antibiotics
(iv) Paleology – Study of Fossils
Answer:
(iii) – Serology study of antibiotics

Question 2.
Type Example
(i) Tree – Solanum violceum
(ii) Prickles on the Body of the plant – Solanum xantho carpum
(iii) Vines – Lycium sinensis
(iv) Herb – Solanum nigrum
Answer:
(II) prickles on the body of the plant – body Solanum xantho carpum

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 3.
Botanical Garden Major Attraction
(i) Nation Botanical Garden Lucknow – Germplasm collection & exsitu conversation
(ii) JNTBGRI Trivandrum (Kerala) – Bambusetum
(iii) National orchidarium Yercaud – Fernery
(iv) Indian Botanical Garden Kolkata – The great Banyan tree
Answer:
(iii) National orchidarium Yercard – Fernery

Question 4.
Choose the right answer :
(i) Plants having Dome-shaped thalamus – Gamopetalae
(ii) Plants having Cup-shaped thalamus – Calyciflorae
(iii) Plants having epigynous flowers – Thalamiflorae
(iv) Plants with united petals & sepals – Inferae
Answer:
(ii) Plants having cup-shaped thalamus Calyciflorae

VII. Match correctly & give the correct answer

Question 1.
(i) Systema Naturae -A. 1862-63
(ii) Philosophia botanica -B.1753
(iii) Species plantarum -C. 1735
(iv) General plantarum -D.1737
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 5
Answer:
c) C – D – B – A

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 2.
(i) Library of British Museum – A. Revision
(ii) Malvaceae of India by T.K. Paul – B. Catalogue
(iii) Family of Lentibulariaceae
by M.K. Janarthanam & Henry – C. Botanical Garden Lucknow
(iv) 500 species of rose hybrids – D. Monograph
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 6
Answer:
a) B A D C

Question 3.
Botanical Name – Common Name
(i) Butea Frondosa – A. Rose Wood
(ii) Sesbania grandiflora – B. Garden pea
(iii) Dalbergia latefolia – C. Flame of the forest
(iv) Pisum sativum – D. Agathe
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 7
Answer:
b) C D A B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 4.
Common name Botanical name
(i) Rose wood – A. Pterocarpus dalbergioides
(ii) Red Sandal wood – B. Dalbergia latifolia
(iii) Padauk – C. Pterocarpus marsupium
(iv) Vengai – D. Pterocarpus santalinus
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 8
Answer:
c) B D A C

VIII. Find out the true and false statements from the following and on that basis find the correct answer:

Question 1.
(i) The evolution & classification of flowering plants – Arthur cronquist
(ii) Origin of species – Engler & prantl
(iii) Philosophia botanica – Linnaeus
(iv) Theorie elementaire de-botanique – A.P. de. Candolle
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 9
Answer:
a) True False True True

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 2.
Find out the True and False statements from the following and on that basis find the correct answer:
(i) Documents of all plant species in a given geographical area is known as – Monograph
(ii) These are often descriptive & poetic references to plants – Vernacular name
(iii) A complete global account of a taxon of any rank – Flora
(iv) Tools of Identification implemented by Computer – Polyclave key
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 10
Answer:
b) False True False True

Two marks

Question 1.
Define Taxonomy.
Answer:
Taxonomy is “the science dealing with the study of classification including the bases, principles, rules and procedures”.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 2.
What are the characteristics of a species
Answer:

  • Population of organism closely resemble each other
  • Descend from common ancestor
  • They sexually interbreed freely producing fertile offspring
  • They have morphological resemblance in asexually reproducing organism
  • In fossil organisms they are identified by their morphological & anatomical resemblance

Question 3.
Which is the lowest taxon in classification? Define.
Answer:
Species is the lowest taxon in classification. It is defined as the group of individuals which are closely resembling each other and interbreed among themselves producing fertile offspring.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 4.
Define Binomial Nomenclature.
Answer:

  • Introduced by Gaspard Barhin
  • Implemented by Carolus Linnaeus
  • Scientific name of a plant consists of 2 words.
  • First one is Genus name
  • Second one is Species name.
  • Genus Species

Eg: Mangifera – Genus – indica – Species

Question 5.
What are vernacular names? Give an example.
Answer:
Vernacular names are known as common names. Example: Albizia Amara L. is called as Usilai in South Tamil Nadu and Thurinji in North Tamil Nadu.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 6.
Biosystematics Define & Give its objectives.
Answer:
Definition:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 11

Question 7.
What is the importance of serotaxonomy.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 12

Question 8.
When a neotype specimen is selected?
Answer:
Neotype Specimen is derived from non – original collection selected as the type when the original specimen is missing or destroyed.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 9.
Define karyotaxonomy.
Answer:

  • Increased knowledge of chromosomes Have been used for extensive biosystematic studies & resolving many taxonomic problems.
  • Cytological especially chromosomal characters such as number, size, morphology and behaviour during meiosis are of taxonomic value.

Question 10.
Differentiate Regional Flora from continental flora.
Answer:
Regional Flora from continental flora.

  1. Regional Flora: Flora covering a large geographical area or a botanical region Ex: flora of Madras Presidency.
  2. Continental Flora: Flora covering the entire continent. Ex: flora of Europaea.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 11.
Write down the Aims of Chemotaxonomy.
Answer:

  • To develop taxonomic characters to improve, the existing system of plant classification
  • To improve the present-day knowledge of phylogeny o plants.

Question 12.
Define Biosystematics
Answer:

  • Introduced by Camp and Gilly in 1943
  • It is an experimental, ecological cyto taxonomy through which life forms studied and their relationships defined

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 13.
How Cronquist classified the angiosperms?
Answer:
Cronquist classified the angiosperms into two main classes Magnoliopsida and Liliopsida.

Question 14.
Why do we say that the development of fruit in Arachis hypogea is geocarpic?
Answer:

  • In Arachis hypogea after fartilization, the stipe of ovary become meristematic and grows down into the soil.
  • The ovary gets buried into the soil and so we call the fmit as groundnut.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 15.
Distinguish between Stipule, Stipel and Pulvinus in the leaf of Fabaceae.
Answer:

Stipule

Stipel

Pulvinus

The compound leaf has a stipule a green scale like structure from which the leaf originateIt is a small scaly structure at the base of the leaflet of compound leafThe R achis and petcole of the leaf, and leaf lets have swollen, this condition is known as Pulvinus

Question 16.
Draw the structure of Papilionaceous Carolla of Fabacoae
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 13

Question 17.
Differentiate between Phylloclade & Cladodo of Liliaceae.
Answer:

Phylloclade

Cladodo

(aerial sterm or branch modification)

Eg. Ruscus

Branch is modified . leaves reduced to scales

(aerial sterm modification)

Eg Asparagus

Aerial sterm is modified, leaves reduced to scales

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 18.
Point out the aims of chemotaxonomy.
Answer:
The aims of chemotaxonomy:

  1. To develop taxonomic characters which may improve the existing system of plant classification.
  2. To improve present-day knowledge of the phylogeny of plants.

Question 19.
What is meant by Scapigerous Inflorescence?
Answer:
Here the inflorescence axis (peduncle) arising from the ground bearing a cluster of flowers at its apex, with pedicels of equal length.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 20.
Label the given diagram
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 14
Answer:
A- Pedicil
B – Perianth
C – Epipetalous stamens
D- Ovary

Question 21.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 15
Answer:
A- Persistent calyx
B – Spiny outgrowth
C – Valves
D – Seed

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 22.
Differentiate between Magnoliopsia and Liliopsida

Magnoliopsida

Liliopsida

6 subclasses5 subclasses
64 orders19 orders
318 families65 families
165,000 species50000 species

Demerits:

  • Highly Phylogenetic could not persist.
  • Not useful for identification & cannot be adopted.

Three marks

Question 1.
Compare the Gynoecium of Pisum sativum and Datura metal.
Answer:
Gynoecium of Pisum sativum:

  1. Mono Carpellary
  2. Unilocular
  3. Ovules on marginal placentation
  4. Feathery stigma

Gynoecium of Datura metal:

  1. Bicarpellary
  2. Tetralocular
  3. Ovules on axile placentation
  4. Bilobed stigma

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 2.
Distinguish between Monophyletic, Paraphyletic & polyphyletic group.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 16

Question 3.
Why do we think that cladistics is of much needed and important today?
Answer:

  • Commonly used & accepted for phylogenetic classifications.
  • Produces a hypothesis about the relationship of organisms to predict the morphological characteristics of an organism.
  • Help to elucidate the mechanism of evolution.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 4.
Give the systematic position of Pea family.
Answer:

APG Classification

Bentham & Hooker’s Classifications

KingdomPlantaeKingdomPlantae
CladeAngiospermClassDicotyledonae
CladeEudicotsSub classPolypetatae
CladeRosidsSeriesCalyaflorae
OrderFabalesOrderRosales
FamilyFabaceaeFamilyFabaceae

Question 5.
Differentiate between Taxonomy & Systematics.
Answer:
Taxonomy:

  1. The discipline of classifying organisms into taxa
  2. Governs the practices of naming, describing, identifying and specimen preservation.
  3. Classification + Nomenclature = Taxonomy

Systematics:

  1. Broad field of biology that studies the diversification of species
  2. Governs the evolutionary history and phylogenetic relationship in addition to taxonomy
  3. Taxonomy + Phylogeny = Systematics

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 6.
Define Herbarium.
Answer:

  • Collection of collected, pressed and dried plant specimens preserved, then mounted on a sheet of paper is referred to as Herbarium.
  • It also refers to the Institution where many such Herbaria are preserved.
  • Eg. Royal Botanical garden Kew London.

Question 7.
Linnaeus classification is also called sexual system of classification. Why?
Answer:
Linnaeus classification is mostly based on sexual characters like number, union, length and distribution of stamens and also on carpel characters. Hence it is called sexual system of classification.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 8.
Various types of habits in Fabaceae.
Answer:

Herb

Indigofera, crotalaria

Prostrate herbsIndigofera enneaphylla
Erect herbCrotalaria verrucosa
ShrubsCajanus cajan
Small treesSesbania
Climbers Large treesClitoria sp Pongamia, Dalbergia
Woody climberMucuna
HydrophyteAeschyno mene aspera

Question 9.
Explain Androecium of Family Fabaceae
Answer:
1. Diadelphous – Stamens (9) + 1-9 Stamens united 1 free
2. Diadelphous – (5) + (5) – Stamens in 2 bundles of 5 each.
3. Monoadelphous but dimorphic – Out of 10 stamens 5 are with longer flaments longer anther 5 are with shorter Flaments and short anthers known as Dimorphic

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 17

Question 10.
Tabulate various types of Inflorescence of Solanaceae
Answer:

Solitary flower

Datura stramonium

Terminal cymoseSolanum
Extra axillary Scorpioid cymo or RhipidiumSolanurn nigrurn
Helicoid cymeSolanurn tuberosum
Umbellate cymeWithania somnifera

Question 11.
Tabulate various types of petals of Solanaceae.
Answer:

5 petals – sympetalous
Rotate & tubular – Solanum
Bell-shaped – Atropa
I Infundibuliform  – Petunia
Bilipped & Zygomorphic – Schizanthus
Infundibuliform & Convolute – Datura

Question 12.
Tabulate ornamental plants from any 3 families you have studied.
Answer:

Family FabaceaeFamily  Solanaceae

Family Liliaceae

 Butea frondosa (Flame of the forest) Clitoria tematea (sangu – flower)Cestrium diumum – day Tulipa suaveolens — Tulip Jasmine)Petunia hybrida Agapanthus african  us garden petunia (African only

Five Marks

Question 1.
What is meant by Taxonomical Aids. Explain any one of it
Answer:

  • Tools aiding Taxonomical study are known as Taxonomical Aids
  • There are many types of these Aids keys, Flora, Revisions Monograph, Catalogues,
  • Herbarium and Botanical garden

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 18
Types:

  • Local Flora – Covers limited area sate, Country, City mountain, etc Eg. Flora of Thiruvannamalai District
  • Regional Flora – Include large geographical area Eg. Flora of Tamilnadu Carnatic by K.M. Mathew
  • Continental Flora – Cover entire continent Eg. Flora of Europaea by D.A. Web
  • Electronic Flora – Digital format of flora published online Eg. E Flora of China

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 2.
Type Concept Explain also its types
Answer:
ICN’s second principle is that a specimen must be associated with a scientific name known as nomenclatural type (specimen, or its illustration)
Eg. Herbarium sheet: –

There are 7 types

  1.  Holotype:
    The original Protologue of the author is a definite source of identity
    Citation & submission of it is one of the criteria for valid publication of a botanical name
  2. Isotype: Duplicate of Holotypes
    • Same person on the same date with same field number
    • Reliable duplicates of holotype – to be distributed to various herbaria of various region
  3. Lectotype: Specimen selected from original material may serve as Lectotype when holotype is missing or destroyed
  4. Syntype: When the author cites more than one specimen in his Protologue without designating Holotype.
  5. Neotype: Specimen from the non-original collection when original
  6. Paratype: holotype missing or destroyed: specimen other than Holo, Iso, or Syntype
  7. Epitope: Specimen or illustration serves as an interpretive type when all the above types are ambiguous.

Question 3.
Draw the outline classification of APG IV.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 19

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 4.
Give an account of APG classification
Answer:

  • Most recent classification of flowering plants
  • Done in last decade of 20th century
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 20
  • All these provide data with respect to DNA seqences of 2 chloroplast genes (extrachromosomal) (atp B and r bcL) and one nuclear gene (nuclear ribosomal 18 s DNA).

Question 5.
Tabulate Bentham & Hooker’s system of classification
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 21

Question 6.
Define biosystematics & list out the aim of biosystematics.
Answer:
1. Biosystematics: Biosystematics is an “Experimental, ecological and cytotaxonomy” through which life forms are studied and their relationships are defined.
2. Aims of Biosystematics: The aims of biosystematics are as follows:

  • To delimit the naturally occurring biotic community of plant species.
  • To establish the evolution of a group of taxa by understanding the evolutionary and phylogenetic trends.
  • To involve any type of data gathering based on modem concepts and not only on morphology and anatomy.
  • To recognize the various groups as separate biosystematics categories such as ecotypes, ecospecies, cenospecies, and comparium.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 7.
Tabulate various International Herbarium
Answer:
International Herbarium

Herbarium

Year EstablishedAcronym

Number of specimens

1.Museum National d’Historie Naturelle, Paris, France1635P ,PC10,000,000
2. New York Botanical Garden, Bronx, New York, U.S.A1891NY72,00,000
3. Komarov Botanical Institute, St.Petersburg (Leningrad), Russia1823LE71,60,000
4. Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, England, U.K1841K70,00,000

Question 8.
Write down the uses of Herbarium
Answer:

  • Provides resource material for systematic research & studies
  • A place for the orderly arrangement of voucher specimens
  • Voucher specimen serves as a reference for comparing doubtful Newly collected fresh specimen
  • Voucher specimens play a role in
    • Studies like floristic diversity
    • Environmental assessment
    • Ecological mechanisms &
    • Survey of unexplored area
  • provides an opportunity for documenting biodiversity and studies related to the field of ecology & conservation biology.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 9.
Explain Chemotaxonomy
Answer:

  • Study of various chemicals available in plants help to solve the certain taxonomical problem
  • Chemotaxonomy scientific approach of classification of plants on the basis of their biochemical constituents
  • Proteins – (more controlled by genes less subjected to natural selection)
  • So used at all hierarchical level of classification starling from variety to division.
  • Other chemicals studied are – Amino acids, nucleic acids – peptides

Question 10.
Explain Engler & Prantl’s Phylogenetic system of classification
Answer:
The two German scientists published their work in a monumental work.
Die Naturechen P flangen families in 23 volumes.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 22

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 11.
Write down the significance of Molecular taxonomy
Answer:

  • Conserved molecular sequences helped to identify
    Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 23
  • DNA data help in – investigation of evolutionary patterns
  • DNA taxonomy – play vital role in, understanding
  • phytogeography – help in genome mapping & bio deversity Conservation
  • DNA based Molecular markers – used for designing DNA based molecular probes

Question 12.
What is DNA barcoding?
Answer:

  • A scanner like the UPC of supermarket things, – DNA barcoding is a taxonomical device to distinguish one species from another.
  • A very short genetic sequence from a standard part of a genome is used as a DNA tag or barcode to identify a plant
  • Paul Hebert proposed it and so-known as the Father of barcoding.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany

Question 13.
Significance of DNA barcoding.
Answer:

  • Helps in the identification and classification organism
  • Aids in the mapping the extend of bio-diversity
  • Eventhough it require a large data base of sequences for comparison & prior knowledge of the barcoding region, it is helpful tool to determine the authenticity of botanical material in whole, cut or powdered form.

Question 14.
Differences between Classical and Modern taxonomy.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 24
Question 15.
Give an account of Botanical description of clitoria ternatea (Sangupushpam).
Answer:
Habit – Twining climber
Root – Branched tap root system
Stem – Aerial weak stem, twiner
Leaf – Imparipmnately compound, Petcolate, Alternate, stipulate,
Leaf lets stipellate, stipels are pulvinate reticulate venation
Inflorescence – Solitary and Axillary
Flower -Zygomorphic Bracteate, Bracteolate (large) Bisexual complete
Dichlamydeous – Pedicellate, Pentarnerous & Hypogynous
Calyx – 5 sepals synsepalous valvate aestivation odd sepal anterior in position
Corolla – 5 petals apopetalous
1 standard petal -(Vexillum)
2 wing petals -(aiea)
2 keel petal(carina) – united at the base in descendingly imbricate aestivation

Androecium – 10 stamens diadeiphous
(9) + 1 (i.e.) nine united one free in 2 + bundleš
Anther – Dithecous , basifixed introse and devisce by Longitudinal Division
Gynoecium – Made up of ovary style & stigma
Ovary – Superior with a prominent stipe monocarpellary, unilocular with many ovules on marginal placentation

Style – simple incurved
Stigma – feathery
Fruit – Legume
Seed – non endospermous reniform

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 26

Question 16.
Describe any 3 Molecular method ¡n genetic analysis & phylogenetics.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 27

Question 17.
Give an account of the botanical description of Datura metal
Answer:
Habit – Large erect, stout, herb
Root – Branched tap root system
Stem – Hollow, herbaceous strong odour
Leaf – Simple, alternate, petiolate, entire or deeply lobed glabrous, exstipulate unicostate reticulate venation
Inflorescence – Solitary & Axillary cyme
Flower – Actinomorphic, (Regular) Bracteate, Bracteolate, Bisexual Complete Dichlamydeous Pentamerous, sessile & hypogynous
Calyx – 5 sepals synsepalous
Valvate aestivation persistant
Corolla – 5 petals synpetalous plicate 10 lobed Twisted aestivation funneishaped
Androecium – 5 stamens – epipetalous altemi petalous .
Anther – dithecous, basifixed, introse longitudinal dehiseence
Gynoecium – Superior – bicarpellary bilocular,
Ovary – syncarpous basically bilocular later become tetralocular due to the formation of false septa Carpels obliquely placed ovules on swollen axile placentation
Style – simple long flu form
Stigma – bibbed
Fruit – Spinesent capsule opening by four apical valves persistent calyx
Seed – Endospermous
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 29

Question 18.
Give an account of botanical description of Allium cepa.
Answer:
Habit – Perrennial herb with bulb
Root – Fibrous adventitious root system
Stem – Underground bulb
Leaf – Radical leaves cylindrical fleshy with sheathing leaf bases & parallel venation
Inflorescence – scafrigerous, pedicels of equal length arising from apex of peduncle
Flower – Small white
Actinomorphic,
Bracteate, eBracteolate Bisexual Complete
Monochiamydeous.
Trimerous – hypogynous
Flowers – Protandrous
Perianth – 6 Tetals in 2 whorls of 3 each syntepalous Valvate acstivatíon
Androecium – 6 stamens in a whorls of 3 each epipelatous
apostamenous
Anther – Dithecous basifixed, introse and longitudinal dehiscence
Gynoecium
Ovary – Superior, tricarpellary trilocular 2 ovules in each locule on axile
placentation
Style – simple, slender
Sligma – simple
Fruit – loculicidal capsule.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 31

Question 19.
Give an account of the Economic importance of Fabaceae in the form of a Tabulation Economic Importance of the family Fabaceae
Economic
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 32

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 33

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 34
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 35

Question 20.
Economic Importance of Solanaceae
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 36Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 38

Question 21.
Tabulate economic Importance of the family Liliaceae Economic Importance of the family Liliaceae
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Bio Botany Chapter 5 Taxonomy and Systematic Botany 40

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

11th Computer Science Guide Composition and Decomposition Text Book Questions and Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Part I

Choose the correct answer.

Question 1.
Suppose u, v = 10, 5 before the assignment. What are the values of u and v after the . sequence of assignments?
1, u := v
2. v := u
a) u, v = 5, 5
b) u, v = 5, 10
c) u, v = 10, 5
d) u, v = 10, 10
Answer:
a) u, v = 5, 5

Question 2.
Which of the following properties is true after the assignment (at line 3)?
1. — i + j = 0
2. i, j : = i + 1, j – 1
3. –?
a) i + j >0
b) i + j < 0
c) i + j = 0
d) i = j
Answer:
b) i + j < 0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 3.
If Cl is false and C2 is true, the compound statement,
1. if C1
2. S1
3. else
4. if C2
5. S2
6. else
7. S3
executes
a) S1
b) S2
c) S3
d) none
Answer:
b) S2

Question 4.
If C is false just before the loop, the control flows through. –
1. S1
2. while C
3. S2
4. S3
a) S1 ; S3
b) S1 ; S2 ; S3
c) S1 ; S2 ; S2 ; S3
d) S1; S2 ; S2 ; S2 ; S3
Answer:
a) S1 ; S3

Question 5.
If C is true, S1 is executed in both the flowcharts, but S2 is executed in
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 1
a) (1) only
b) (2) only
c) both (1) and (2)
d) neither (1) nor (2)
Answer:
a) (1) only

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 6.
How many times the loop is iterated? i := 0
while i ≠ 5
i : = i + 1
a) 4
b) 5
c) 6
d) 0
Answer:
b) 5

Part II

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between a condition and a statement.
Answer:

ConditionStatement
It is a phrase that describes a test of the state.It is a phrase that commands the computer to do an action.

Question 2.
Draw a flowchart for a conditional statement.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 3.
Both conditional statements and iterative statements have a condition and a statement. How do they differ?
Answer:
Conditional Statement:

  • Statements are executed only once when the condition is true.
  • If condition statement.

Iterative Statement:

  • An iterative statement repeatedly evaluates a condition and executes a statement until it becomes false.
  • While condition statement.

Question 4.
What is the difference between an algorithm and a program?
Answer:

ALGORITHMPROGRAM
It is a step-by-step procedure to solve a problem.It is a set of instructions to solve a problem by the computer.
No need to follow the grammar of a languageFollow strictly the grammar of a programming language.

Question 5.
Why is a function an abstraction?
Answer:
Once a function is defined, it can be used over and over and over again. Reusability of a single function several times is known as an abstraction.

Question 6.
How do we define a statement?
Answer:
In a refinement, starting at a high level, each statement is repeatedly expanded into more detailed statements in the subsequent levels.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Part III

Explain in brief

Question 1.
For the given two flowcharts write the pseudo-code.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 3
Answer:
if condition is True
Execute Statement S1
else
Execute Statement S2
endif
PSEUDO CODE FOR SECOND FLOWCHART
if the condition is True
Execute Statement S1
Execute Statement S2
else
Execute Statement S2
endif.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 2.
If C is false in line 2, trace the control flow in this algorithm.
1. S1
2. — C is false
3. if C
4. S2
5. else
6. S3
7. S4
Answer:
The control flow for the given algorithm is as follows:
S1
S3
S4
The condition is false so it executes S3. In this case S2 skipped.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 3.
What is case analysis?
Answer:
The case Analysis statement generalizes the problem into multiple cases. Case Analysis splits the problem into an exhaustive set of disjoint cases.

Question 4.
Draw a flowchart for -3 case analysis using alternative statements.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 4

Where C1, C2 and C3 are conditions
S1, S2, S3 and S4 are statements.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 5.
Define a function to double a number in two different ways: (1) n + n,(2)2 x n.
Answer:
1. Double (n)
– – inputs: n is a real number or an integer, n > 0
– – Outputs: y is a real number or an integer such that y = n + n

2. Double (n)
– – inputs: n is a real number or an integer, n > 0
– – Outputs: y is a real number or an integer such that y = 2 x n

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Exchange the contents: Given two glasses marked A and B. Glass A is full of apple drink and glass B is full of grape drink. Write the specification for exchanging the contents of glasses A and B, and write a sequence of assignments to satisfy the specification.
Answer:
The sequence of assignments to satisfy the specification:
exchange(A, B)
–inputs : A, B are real and > 0
–outputs: A, B are real and > 0
State representation
T = A
A: = B
B: = T

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 2.
Circulate the contents: Write the specification and construct an algorithm to circulate the contents of the variables A, B and C as shown below: The arrows indicate that B gets the value of A, C gets the value of B and A gets the value of C.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 5
Specification :
Circulated,B,C)
– – inputs: A,B,C all are real numbers
– – outputs: A,B,C, all are real numbers
T: = C
C: = B
B: = A
A: = T

Algorithm :
i) circulated,B,C)
ii) – – A,B,C
iii) T = C
iv) C = B
v) B = A
vi) A: = T

Question 3.
Decanting problem. You are given three bottles of capacities 5, 8, and 3 litres. The 8L bottle is filled with oil, while the other two are empty. Divide the oil in an 8L bottle into two equal quantities. Represent the state of the process by appropriate variables. What are the initial and final states of the process? Model the decanting of oil from one bottle to another by assignment. Write a sequence of assignments to achieve the final state.
Answer:
To divide the oil equally in the oil bottle, the following 7 steps are needed:

  • Pour 5L of oil into the second bottle. (3,5,0)
  • Pour 3L from the second bottle to the third. (3,2,3)
  • Pour 3L from the third to the first. (6,2,0)
  • Pour all 2L from the second to the third bottle (6,0,2)
  • Pour 5L from the first to the second bottle. (1.5.2)
  • Pour 1 L from the second to the third bottle. (1.4.3)
  • Finally, pour now all 3L from the third bottle to the first (4,4,0)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Assignment statement as follows:

  • E,F,T = 8,0,0
  • E,F,T = 3,5,0
  • E,F,T = 3,2,3
  • E,F,T = 6,2,0
  • E,F,T = 6,0,2
  • E,F,T = 1,5,2
  • E,F,T = 1,4,3
  • E,F,T = 4,4,0

Question 4.
Trace the step-by-step execution of the algorithm for factorial(4).
factorial(n)
— inputs i rs is an integer, n > 0
— outputs : f ‘=s n!
f, i := 1,1
while i ≤ n
f,i = 11= f x i, i+1
Answer:
Tracing steps:
factorial(5)
i) f = 1, i = 1
ii) f = 1 x 1, i = 2
iii) f = 1 x 2, i = 3
iv) f = 2 x 3, i = 4
v) f = 6 x 4, i = 5
vi) f = 24 x 5, i = 6
vii) condition 6 < 5 becomes false then display output f value as 24.

11th Computer Science Guide Composition and Decomposition Additional Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
Which one of the following is odd?
(a) Python
(b) C++
(c) C
(d) Ctrl + S
Answer:
(d) Ctrl + S

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 2.
_________ is a notation for representing algorithms.
a) programming language
b) pseudo code
c) flow chart
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 3.
There are important control flow statements.
(a) four
(b) three
(c) two
(d) five
Answer:
(b) three

Question 4.
_________ is a notation similar to programming languages.
a) programming language
b) pseudo code
c) flow chart
d) none of these
Answer:
b) pseudo code

Question 5.
A ………………. is contained in a rectangular box with a single outgoing arrow, which points to the box to be executed next.
(a) statement
(b) composition
(c) notation
(d) condition
Answer:
(a) statement

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 6.
_________ is a diagrammatic notation for representing algorithms.
a) programming language
b) pseudo code
c) flow chart
d) none of these
Answer:
c) flow chart

Question 7.
The algorithm can be specified as ……………….
(a) monochromatize (a, b, c)
(b) a = b = 0
(c) C = A + B + C
(d) none
Answer:
(a) monochromatize (a, b, c)

Question 8.
An algorithm expressed in a_________ is called a program.
a) programming language
b) pseudo code
c) flow chart
d) none of these
Answer:
a) programming language

Question 9.
Which one of the following is the elementary problem-solving technique?
(a) Specification
(b) Abstraction
(c) Composition
(d) decomposition
Answer:
(d) decomposition

Question 10.
_________ is formal.
a) programming language
b) pseudo code
c) flow chart
d) none of these
Answer:
a) programming language

Question 11.
How many different notations are there for representing algorithms?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(b) 3

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 12.
_________ do not allow the informal style of natural languages such as English or Tamil.
a) programs
b) pseudo code
c) flow charts
d) none of these
Answer:
a) programs

Question 13.
Which one of the following algorithmic notations is used for communication among people?
(a) Flow chart
(b) Pseudo code
(c) PL
(d) Interpreter
Answer:
(b) Pseudo code

Question 14.
_________ notation is not formal nor exact.
a) programs
b) pseudo code
c) flow charts
d) none of these
Answer:
b) pseudo code

Question 15.
The algorithmic notation similar to a Programming language is ……………….
(a) Flow chart
(b) Pseudo code
(c) C ++
(d) C
Answer:
(b) Pseudo code

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 16.
In _________, there is no need to follow the rules of the grammar of a programming language.
a) programs
b) pseudo code
c) flow charts
d) none of these
Answer:
b) pseudo code

Question 17.
Which one is used for converting programs into computer-executable instructions?
(a) Converter
(b) Apps
(c) Translator
(d) exe files
Answer:
(c) Translator

Question 18.
_________ show the control flow of algorithms using diagrams in a visual manner.
a) programs
b) pseudo code
c) flow charts
d) none of these
Answer:
c) flow charts

Question 19.
The notation which is not formal nor exact is ……………….
(a) Flow chart
(b) Pseudocode
(c) Compiler
(d) Translator
Answer:
(b) Pseudocode

Question 20.
In flowcharts, _________ boxes represent conditions.
a) arrows
b) diamond shaped
c) rectangular shaped
d) none of these
Answer:
b) diamond shaped

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 21.
Find the pair which is wrongly matched.
(a) Rectangular boxes – Statements
(b) Diamond boxes – Output
(c) Arrow – Control flow
(d) Parallelogram – Input
Answer:
(b) Diamond boxes – Output

Question 22.
A condition is contained in a diamond-shaped box with _________ outgoing arrows.
a) two
b) three
c) one
d) many
Answer:
a) two

Question 23.
The inputs and outputs are drawn using ……………….. boxes.
(a) rectangular
(b) diamond
(c) Parallelogram
(d) Oval
Answer:
(c) Parallelogram

Question 24.
In flow chart, _________ marked Start and the End are used to indicate the start and the end of an execution:
a) special box (oval)
b) diamond shaped
c) rectangular shaped
d) parallelogram
Answer:
a) special box (oval)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 25.
The flow of control is represented in the flowchart by ………………..
(a) arrow
(b) dot
(c) box
(d) plus
Answer:
(a) arrow

Question 26.
A_________ is a phrase that commands the computer to do an action.
a) statement
b) sentence
c) walkthrough
d) none of these
Answer:
a) statement

Question 27.
A condition is contained in a diamond-shaped box with ……………….. outgoing arrows.
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(a) 2

Question 28.
Statements composed of other statements are known as_________ statements.
a) compound
b) bock
c) nested
c) none of these
Answer:
a) compound

Question 29.
_________ statement are compound statements.
a) input
b) output
c) comment
d) control flow
Answer:
d) control flow

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 30.
How many outgoing arrows are needed for rectangular boxes in the flow chart?
(a) 0
(b) 1
(c) 2
(d) 3
Answer:
(b) 1

Question 31.
___________ is a control flow statements.
a) Sequential
b) Alternative
c) Iterative
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 32.
Which one of the following is not a control flow statement?
(a) Sequential
(b) Assignment
(c) Iterative
(d) Alternative
Answer:
(b) Assignment

Question 33.
Case analysis splits the problem into an exhaustive set of __________ cases.
a) disjoint
b) similar
c) recursive
d) none of these
Answer:
a) disjoint

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 34.
Which one of the following statements are executed one after the other as written in the algorithm?
(a) Sequential
(b) Iterative
(c) Conditional
(d) Decisive
Answer:
(a) Sequential

Question 35.
An__________ executes the same action repeatedly, subject to a condition.
a) iterative process
b) condition
c) sequential
d) None of these
Answer:
a) iterative process

Question 36.
Case analysis statement generalizes the statement into ……………….. cases.
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 5
(d) multiple
Answer:
(d) multiple

Question 37.
Testing the loop condition and executing the , loop body once is called.
a) iteration
b) condition
c) sequential
d) none of these
Answer:
a) iteration

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 38.
Which one of the following processes executes the same action repeatedly?
(a) Conditional
(b) Alternative
(c) Iterative
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) Iterative

Question 39.
__________ breaking and combining the solutions of the smaller problems to solve the original problem.
a) Composition
b) Decomposition
c) Eliminating
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Decomposition

Question 40.
Testing the loop condition and executing the loop body once is called ………………..
(a) alternative
(b) conditional
(c) Iteration
(d) Decomposition
Answer:
(c) Iteration

Question 41.
A(n)__________ is like a sub-algorithm.
a) function
b) array
c) structure
d) None of these
Answer:
a) function

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 42.
A __________ can be used as a black box in solving other problems.
a) function
b) array
c) structure
d) None of these
Answer:
a) function

Question 43.
Identify the correct statement from the following.
a) There is no need for the users to know how the function is implemented in order to use it.
b) An algorithm used to implement a function may maintain its own variables.
c) users of the function need only to know what the function does, and not how it is done by the function.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 44.
Conditional statement is executed only if the condition is true. Otherwise, __________ .
a) terminates the algorithm
b) repeat the procedure
c) skip the loop
d) nothing is done
Answer:
d) nothing is done

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is programming language?
Answer:
A programming language is a notation for expressing algorithms to be executed by computers.

Question 2.
What is a Pseudocode?
Answer:
Pseudocode is a mix of programming languages like constructs and plain English. Algorithms expressed in Pseudocode are not intended to be executed by computers but for human readers to understand.

Question 3.
What is flowchart?
Answer:
A flowchart is a diagrammatic notation for representing algorithms. They give a visual intuition of the flow of control, when the algorithm is executed.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 4.
What is a control flow statement? Classify it.
Answer:
Control flow statements are compound statements. They are used to alter the control flow of the process depending on the state of the process. They are classified as:

  1. Sequential
  2. Alternative
  3. Iterative

Question 5.
What are the constraints of a programming language?
Answer:

  • Programming language is formal.
  • Programs must obey the grammar of the programming language exactly. Even punctuation symbols must be exact.
  • They do not allow the informal style of natural languages such as English or Tamil.

Question 6.
When a condition statement will be executed?
Answer:
It will be executed only when the condition statement is true.

Question 7.
What is the advantage of a flowchart?
Answer:
They show the control flow of algorithms using diagrams in a visual manner.

Question 8.
What is a statement?
Answer:
A statement is a phrase that commands the computer to do an action.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 9.
What do you mean by compound statement?
Answer:
Statements may be composed of other statements, leading to a hierarchical structure of algorithms. Statements composed of other statements are known as compound statements.

Question 10.
What are the control flow statements?
Answer:
There are three important control flow statements:

  • Sequential
  • Alternative
  • Iterative

Question 11.
What happen when a control flow statement is executed?
Answer:
When a control flow statement is executed, the state of the process is tested, and depending on the result, a statement is selected for execution.

Question 12.
Write the specification for finding minimum of two numbers.
Answer:
The specification of algorithm minimum is minimum (a, b)
– – inputs: a , b
– – outputs: result = a ↓ b.

Part III

Explain in brief

Question 1.
How many notations are there for representing algorithms? Explain.
Answer:
There are mainly three different notations for representing algorithms.

  • A programming language is a notation for expressing algorithms to be executed by computers.
  • Pseudocode is a notation similar to programming languages. Algorithms expressed in pseudo-code are not intended to be executed by computers, but for communication among people.
  • A flowchart is a diagrammatic notation for representing algorithms. They give a visual intuition of the flow of control, when the algorithm is executed.

Question 2.
What are the disadvantages of a flowchart?
Answer:
Flowcharts also have the following disadvantages:

  • Flowcharts are less compact than the representation of algorithms in a programming language or pseudo code.
  • They obscure the basic hierarchical structure of the algorithms.
  • Alternative statements and loops are disciplined control flow structures.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 3.
Write a note on refinement.
Answer:
After decomposing a problem into smaller subproblems, the next step is either to refine the subproblem or to abstract the subproblem.
1. Each subproblem can be expanded into more detailed steps. Each step can be further expanded to still finer steps, and so on. This is known as refinement.

2. We can also abstract the subproblem. We specify each subproblem by its input property and the input-output relation. While solving the main problem, we only need to know the specification of the subproblems. We do not need to know how the subproblems are solved.

Question 4.
Write an algorithm that compares numbers and produces the result as
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 6
We can split the state into an exhaustive set of 3 disjoint cases: a < b, a = b, and a> b. Then we can define compare() using a case analysis. The algorithm is as given below.

  1. compare(a, b)
  2. case a < b
  3. result := -1
  4. case a = b
  5. result := 0
  6. else – – a > b
  7. result: = 1

Question 5.
Construct specification and write an iterative algorithm to compute the quotient and remainder after dividing an integer A by another integer B.
Answer:
Specification: divide (A, B)
— inputs: A is an integer and B ≠ 0
— outputs : q and r such that A = q x B
+ r and 0 ≤ r < B

Algorithm:
divide (A, B)
— inputs: A is an integer and B * 0
— outputs : q and r such that
A = q X B + r and
— 0 < r < B
q := 0, A
while r ≥ B
q, r := q + 1, r – B

Question 6.
Explain Decomposition.
Answer:
It involves breaking down a problem into smaller and more manageable problems, and combining the solutions of the smaller problems to solve the original problem. Often, problems have structure.
We can exploit the structure of the problem and break it into smaller problems. Then, the smaller problems can be further broken until they become sufficiently small to be solved by other simpler means.
Their solutions are then combined together to construct a solution to the original problem.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 7.
Construct an iterative algorithm to compute the quotient and remainder after dividing an integer A by another integer B.
Answer:
divide (A, B)
– – inputs: A is an integer and B ≠ 0
– – Outputs: q and r such that A = q x B + r and 0 < r < B
q : = 0, A
While r ≥ B
q, r : = q + 1, r – B

Question 8.
Draw a flow chart for Eat breakfast.
Answer:
Flowchart for Eat breakfast
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 7

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
What is flowchart? Explain the various boxes (symbols) used in flowchart.
Answer:
A flowchart is a diagrammatic notation for representing algorithms. They show the control flow of algorithms using diagrams in a visual manner.

In flowcharts, rectangular boxes represent simple statements, diamond-shaped boxes
represent conditions, and arrows describe how the control flows during the execution of the algorithm. A flowchart is a collection of boxes containing statements and conditions which are connected by arrows showing the order in which the boxes are to be executed,

i) A statement is contained in a rectangular box with a single outgoing arrow, which points to the box to be executed next.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 8

ii) A condition is contained in a diamond-shaped box with two outgoing arrows, labeled true and false. The true arrow points to the box to be executed next if the condition is true, and the false arrow points to the box to be executed next if the condition is false.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 9

iii) Parallelogram boxes represent inputs given and outputs produced.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 10

iv) Special boxes marked Start and the End is used to indicate the start and the end of execution.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 2.
Draw a flowchart to compute the quotient and remainder after dividing an integer A by another integer B.
Answer:
Flowchart for integer division
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 12

Question 3.
Explain sequential statement with suitable example.
Answer:
A sequential statement is composed of a sequence of statements. The statements in the sequence are executed one after another, in the same order as they are written in the algorithm, and the control flow is said to be sequential. Let S1 and S2 be statements. A sequential statement composed of S1 and S2 is written as
S1
S2
In order to execute the sequential statement, first, do S1 and then do S2.

The sequential statement given above can be represented in a flowchart as shown in in the following Figure. The arrow from S1 to S2 indicates that S1 is executed, and after that, S2 is executed.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 13

Let the input property be P, and the input-output relation be Q, for a problem. If statement S solves the problem, it is written as
i) –P
ii) S
iii) — Q

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 4.
Explain alternative statement with an example. A condition is a phrase that describes a test of the state. If C is a condition and both SI and S2 are statements, then

if C
S1
else
S2

is a statement, called an alternative statement, that describes the following action:
i) Test whether C is true Or false.
ii) If C is true, then do SI; otherwise do S2.

In pseudo-code, the two alternatives S1 and S2 are indicated by indenting them from the keywords if and else, respectively. Alternative control flow is depicted in the following flowchart.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 14

Condition C has two outgoing arrows, labeled true and false. The true arrow points to the SI box. The false arrow points to the S2 box. Arrows out of S1 and S2 point to the same box, the box after the alternative statement.

Question 5.
Explain conditional statement with suitable example.
Answer:
Sometimes we need to execute a statement only if a condition is true and do nothing if the condition is false. This is equivalent to the alternative statement in which the else-clause is empty. This variant of alternative statement is called a conditional statement. If C is a condition and S is a statement, then
if C
S
is a statement, called a conditional statement, that describes the following action:

  • Test whether C is true or false.
  • If C is true then do S; otherwise do nothing.

The conditional control flow is depicted in the following flowchart.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 15

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 6.
Write a note on case analysis.
Answer:
An alternative statement analyses the problem into two cases. The case analysis statement generalizes it to multiple cases. Case analysis splits the problem into an exhaustive set of disjoint cases. For each case, the problem is solved independently. If C1, C2, and C3 are conditions, and S1, S2, S3, and S4 are statements, a 4 – case analysis statement has the form.

  1. case C1
  2. S1
  3. case C2
  4. S2
  5. case C3
  6. S3
  7. else
  8. S4

The conditions C1, C2, and C3 are evaluated in turn. For the first condition that evaluates to true, the corresponding statement is executed, and the case analysis statement ends. If none of the conditions evaluates to true, then the default case S4 is executed.

  1. The cases are exhaustive: at least one of the cases is true. If all conditions are false, the default case is true.
  2. The cases are disjoint: only one of the cases is true. Though it is possible for more than one condition to be true, the case analysis always executes only one case, the first one that is true.
  3. f the three conditions are disjoint, then the four cases are (1) C1, (2) C2, (3) C3, (4) (not C1), and (not C2) and (not C3).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition

Question 7.
Explain iterative statement with suitable example.
Answer:
An iterative process executes the same action repeatedly, subject to a condition C.
If C is a condition and S is a statement, then
while C
S
is a statement, called an iterative statement, that describes the following action:

  • Test whether C is true or false.
  • If C is true, then do S and go back to step 1; otherwise do nothing.

The iterative statement is commonly known as a loop. These two steps, testing C and executing S, are repeated until C becomes false. When C becomes false, the loop ends, and the control flows to the statement next to the iterative statement.

The condition C and the statement S are called the loop condition and the loop body, respectively. Testing the loop condition and executing the loop body once is called an iteration, not C is known as the termination condition.
Iterative control flow is depicted in the following flowchart
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Composition and Decomposition 16

Condition C has two outgoing arrows, true and false. The true arrow points to S box. If C is true, S box is executed and control flows back to C box. The false arrow points to the box after the iterative statement (dotted box). If C is false, the loop ends and the control flows to the next box after the loop.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

11th Computer Science Guide Specification and Abstraction Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the best answer

Question 1.
Which of the following activities is algorithmic in nature?
a) Assemble a bicycle
b) Describe a bicycle
c) Label the parts of a bicycle
d) Explain how a bicycle works
Answer:
a) Assemble a bicycle

Question 2.
Which of the following activities is not algorithmic in nature?
a) Multiply two numbers
b) Draw a kolam
c) Walk in the park
d) Braid the hair
Answer:
d) Braid the hair

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 3.
Omitting details inessential to the task and representing only the essential features of the task is known as
a) specification
b) abstraction
c) composition
d) decomposition
Answer:
b) abstraction

Question 4.
Stating the input property and the as :-output relation a problem is known
a) specification
b) statement
c) algorithm
d) definition
Answer:
a) specification

Question 5.
Ensuring the input-output relation is
a) the responsibility of the algorithm and the right of the user
b) the responsibility of the user and the right of the algorithm
c) the responsibility of the algorithm but not the right of the user
d) the responsibility of both the user and the algorithm
Answer:
d) the responsibility of both the user and the algorithm

Question 6.
If i = 5 before the assignment i := i-1 after the assignment? the value of i is
a) 5
b) 4
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
b) 4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 7.
If 0 < i before the assignment S := i-1 after the assignment, we cars conclude that
a) 0 < i
b) 0 < i c) i = 0 d) 0 >i
Answer:
b) 0 < i

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
Define an algorithm
Answer:
An algorithm is a step-by-step sequence of statements intended to solve a problem. An algorithm starts execution with the input data, executes the statements, and finishes execution with the output data.

Question 2.
Distinguish between an algorithm and a process.
Answer:
An algorithm is a sequence of instructions to accomplish a task or solve a problem.
An instruction describes an action. When the instructions are executed, a process evolves which accomplishes the intended task or solves the given problem.
We can compare an algorithm to a recipe, and the resulting process to cooking.

Question 3.
Initially, farmer, goat, grass, wolf = L, L, L, L, and the farmer crosses the river with a goat. Model the action with an assignment statement.
Answer:
The sequence of assignments for goat, grass, and wolf problem.

1. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = L, L, L, L
2. farmer, goat = R, R
3. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = R, R, L, L
4. farmer = L
5. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = L, R, L, L
6. farmer, grass = R, R
7. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = R, R, R, L
8. farmer, goat = L, L
9. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = L, L, R, L
10. farmer, wolf = R, R
11. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = R, L, R, R
12. farmer = L
13. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = L, L, R, R
14. farmer, goat =R, R
15. farmer, goat, grass, wolf = R, R, R, R

Question 4.
Specify a function to find the minimum of two numbers.
Answer:

  1. – – minimum (a,b)
  2. – – inputs: a, b are real numbers.
  3. – – output: result: = minimum (a,b)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 5.
If √2 = 1.414, and the square_root() function returns -1.414, does it violate the following specification?
— square_root (x)
— inputs: x is a real number, x ≥ 0
— outputs: y is d real number such that y2 = x
Answer:
— square_root (x)
— inputs: x is a real number, x > 0
— outputs: y is d real number such that y2 = x
Yes. It violates the specification. For a positive input (x > 0), the output square-root value should also be positive.

Part III

Explain in brief.

Question 1.
When do you say that a problem is algorithmic in nature?
Answer:
A Problem is algorithmic in nature when its solution involves the construction of an algorithm. Also when the

  1. Input data and output data of the problem are specified.
  2. The relation between the input data and the output data is specified.

Question 2.
What is the format of the specification of an algorithm?
Answer:
An algorithm is specified by the properties of the given input and the relation between the input and the desired output. In simple words, the specification of an algorithm is the desired input-output relation.

Let P be the required property of the inputs and Q the property of the desired outputs. Then the algorithm S is specified as;

  • algorithm_name (inputs)
  • – inputs: P
  • – outputs: Q

This specification means that if the algorithm starts with inputs satisfying P, then it will finish with the outputs satisfying Q.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 3.
What is abstraction?
Answer:
Abstraction:
It is the facility to define objects. It also involves the removal of unnecessary attributes and defining only essential attributes. For example, when we represent the state of a process we select only the variables essential to the problem and ignore inessential details.

Question 4.
How is the state represented in algorithms?
Answer:
Computational processes in the real-world have stated. As a process evolves, the state changes.
The state of a process can be represented by a set of variables in an algorithm. The state at any point of execution is simply the values of the variables at that point. As the values of the variables are changed, the state changes.

Example:
State: A traffic signal may be in one of the three states: green, amber, or red. The state is changed to allow a smooth flow of traffic. The state may be represented by a single variable signal which can have one of the three values: green, amber, or red.

Question 5.
What is the form and meaning of the assignment statement?
Answer:
Variables are named boxes to store values. The assignment statement is used to store a value in a variable. It is written with the variable on the left side of the assignment operator and a value on the right side.
variable := value

When this assignment is executed, the value on the right side is stored in the variable on the left side. The assignment
m := 2 stores value 2 in variable m.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction 1
If the variable already has a value stored in it, the assignment changes its value to the value on the right side. The old value of the variable is lost.
The right side of an assignment can be an expression.
variable := expression
In this case, the expression is evaluated and the value of the expression is stored in the variable.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 6.
What is the difference between assignment operator and equality operator?
Answer:

Assignment operatorEquality operator
It assign right-hand side of the assignment operator value(constant / variable/ expression) to the left-hand side variable.It compares both operands and returns True if it is equal otherwise False. It is a relational operator.

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Write the specification of an algorithm hypotenuse whose inputs are the lengths of the two shorter sides of a right-angled triangle, and the output is the length of the third side.
Answer:
hypotenuse(sl, s2).
— inputs: si and s2 both are real numbers
— outputs: I is a real number such that
l2 = s12+ S22.

Question 2.
Suppose you want to solve the quadratic equation ax2 + bx + c = 0 by an algorithm.
quadratic_solve (a, b, c)
— inputs : ?
— outputs: ?
You intend to use the formula and you are prepared to handle only real number roots. Write a suitable specification.
\(x=\frac{-b \pm \sqrt{b^{2}-4 a c}}{2 a}\)
Solution;
quadratic_solve (a, b, c).
– inputs : a,b,c all are real numbers, a ≠ 0.
– outputs: x is a real number.
\(x=\frac{-b \pm \sqrt{b^{2}-4 a c}}{2 a}\)
such that b2 – 4ac > 0.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 3.
Exchange the contents: Given two glasses marked A and B Glass A is full of apple drink and glass B is full of grape drink. For exchanging the contents of glasses A and B, represent the state by suitable variables, and write the specification of the algorithm.
Answer:
The specification of the algorithm:
exchange (A, B)
–inputs: A,B are real and >0
–outputs: A,B are real and >0
State representation
TEMP:=A
A:=B
B := TEMP

11th Computer Science Guide Specification and Abstraction Additional Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the best answer

Question 1.
Which one of the following is an example of a process?
(a) Braid the hair
(b) Adding three numbers
(c) Cooking a dish
(d) Walk in the Road
Answer:
(c) Cooking a dish

Question 2.
An instruction describes an __________
a) action
b) input
c) output
d) flow
Answer:
a) action

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 3.
How many basic building blocks construct an algorithm?
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 5
(d) 8
Answer:
(b) 4

Question 4.
Instructions of a computer are also known as _________
a) statements
b) structures
c) procedures
d) None of these
Answer:
a) statements

Question 5.
……………….. how many control flow statement is there to alter the control flow depending on the state?
(a) 5
(b) 6
(c) 3
(d) 8
Answer:
(c) 3

Question 6.
__________ is a step in solving a mathematical problem suggested by G Polya.
a) Understand the problem and Devise a plan
b) Carry out the plan
c) Review your work
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 7.
……………….. statement is used to store a value in a variable.
(a) Assignment
(b) Sequential control flow
(c) Alternative control flow
(d) Iterative
Answer:
(a) Assignment

Question 8.
__________takes input data, process the data, and produce output data.
a) Function
b) Algorithm
c) Procedure
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Algorithm

Question 9.
Each part of the algorithm is known as ………………..
(a) input
(b) function
(c) variable
(d) program
Answer:
(b) function

Question 10.
When we do operations on data, we need to store the results in________
a) Function
b) Algorithm
c) Constant
d) Variable
Answer:
d) Variable

Question 11.
If i: = 3 before the assignment, i: = i + 1 after the assignment ………………..
(a) 3
(b) 4
(c) 5
(d) 0
Answer:
(b) 4

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 12.
In algorithm, the statement to be executed next may depend on the __________
a) algorithm step
b) state of the process
c) user direction
d) None of these
Answer:
b) state of the process

Question 13.
If i: = 10 before the assignment, then i: = i % 2 after the assignment
(a) 10
(b) 5
(c) 0
(d) 1
Answer:
(c) 0

Question 14.
There are control flow statements to alter the control flow depending on the state.
a) two
b) five
c) four
d) three
Answer:
d) three

Question 15.
Initially the values of P and C are 4 and 5 respectively
– – P, C : = 4, 5
P : = C
C : = P. Then find P and C
(a) 4 and 4
(b) 5 and 4
(c) 5 and 5
(d) 4 and 5
Answer:
(c) 5 and 5

Question 16.
__________ control flow, a condition of the state is tested, and if the condition is true, one statement is executed; if the condition is false, n alternative statement is executed.
a) alternative
b) iterative
c) random
d) sequential
Answer:
a) alternative

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 17.
How many Algorithmic designing techniques are there?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(c) 4

Question 18.
A ___________ takes an input and produces an output, satisfying a desired input-output relation.
a) function
b) union
c) structures
d) None of these
Answer:
a) function

Question 19.
which one of the following is the equality operator?
(a) =
(b) = =
(c) + +
(d) – –
Answer:
(b) = =

Question 20.
___________ is the basic principle and technique for designing algorithm.
a) Specification
b) Abstraction
c) Composition and Decomposition
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 21.
Which one of the following statements are not executed on the computers?
(a) Comment line
(b) Header file
(c) cin
(d) cout
Answer:
(a) Comment line

Question 22.
Ignoring or hiding unnecessary details and modeling an entity only by its essential properties is known as __________
a) data hiding
b) abstraction
c) data analysis
d) None of these
Answer:
b) abstraction

Question 23.
The values of the variables when the algorithm finishes is ………………..
(a) final stage
(b) final state
(c) last stage
(d) last state
Answer:
(b) final state

Question 24.
An algorithm is composed of__________
statement.
a) assignment
b) control flow
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 25.
Which one of the following is not a building block of the algorithm?
(a) data
(b) state
(c) variables
(d) functions
Answer:
(b) state

Question 26.
To solve a problem, we must state the problem__________
a) clearly and precisely
b) with ambiguity
c) with data hiding
d) None of these
Answer:
a) clearly and precisely

Question 27.
Reasoning:
I. We can store a value in a variable using the assignment operator.
II. We can change the value in a variable using the assignment operator.
III. Assignment operator is = =
(a) I and III are true
(b) I and II are true
(c) II and III are true
(d) I, II, III is true
Answer:
(b) I and II are true

Question 28.
Specification of an algorithm is the desired __________relation.
a) input-process
b) process-output
c) input-output
d) None of these
Answer:
c) input-output

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 29.
In which one of the control flow statements, if the condition is false, then the alternative statement will be executed ………………..
(a) Sequential
(b) iterative
(c) selection
(d) alternative
Answer:
(d) alternative

Question 30.
The values of the variables when the algorithm starts are known as the __________state.
a) initial
b) final
c) intermediate
d) None of these
Answer:
a) initial

Question 31.
If the statement is executed one after the other, then it is a control flow.
(a) Sequential
(b) iterative
(c) selection
(d) alternative
Answer:
(a) Sequential

Question 32.
We can write the specification in a standard __________part format.
a) three
b) four
c) two
d) many
Answer:
a) three

Question 33.
Which one of the following is not a technique for designing algorithms?
(a) specifications
(b) abstraction
(c) encapsulation
(d) composition
Answer:
(c) encapsulation

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 34.
__________defines the rights and responsibilities of the designer and the user.
a) Specification
b) Abstraction
c) Composition and Decomposition
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Specification

Question 35.
How many parts are there in the specification is ………………..
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(b) 3

Question 36.
In algorithms, the state of a computation is abstracted by a set of __________
a) expressions
b) variables
c) functions
d) None of these
Answer:
b) variables

Question 37.
Identify the statement which is not true?
(a) An instruction describes an object
(b) the specification is one of the algorithm design techniques
(c) An algorithm is a step by step sequence of instructions
Answer:
(a) An instruction describes an object

Question 38.
_________ is a basic and important abstraction.
a) process
b) state
c) addition
d) None of these
Answer:
d) None of these

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 39.
Sequential, Alternative, and Iterative comes under the classification of ……………….. :
(a) Building blocks of the algorithm
(b) control flow statements
(c) Algorithm design techniques
(d) Abstraction
Answer:
(b) control flow statements

Part II

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define State.
Answer:
The state of a process can be represented by a set of variables in an algorithm. The State at any point of execution is simply the values of the variables at that point.

Question 2.
What is the statement?
Answer:
Instructions of a computer are also known as statements.

Question 3.
Define variable.
Answer:
The data stored in a variable is also known as the value of the variable. We can store a value in a variable or change the value of a variable, using an assignment statement.

Question 4.
What are the building blocks of algorithms?
Answer:
The building blocks of algorithms are;

  • Data.
  • Variables.
  • Control flow.
  • Functions.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 5.
Define control flow.
Answer:
The order in which the statements are executed may differ from the order in which they are written in the algorithm. This order of execution of statements is known as the control flow.

Question 6.
What is a function?
Answer:
The parts of an algorithm are known as functions. A function is like a sub-algorithm. It takes an input, and produces an output, satisfying the desired input, output relation.

Question 7.
How will you specify the algorithm?
Answer:
The algorithm S is specified as;

  • algorithm_name (inputs)
  • inputs: P
  • outputs: Q

This specification means that if the algorithm starts with inputs satisfying P, then it will finish with the outputs satisfying Q.

Question 8.
Define abstraction.
Answer:
Abstraction is the process of ignoring or hiding irrelevant details and modeling a problem only by its essential features.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 9.
What purpose abstraction is used?
Answer:
Abstraction is the most effective mental tool used for managing complexity. If we do not abstract a problem adequately, we may deal with unnecessary details and complicate the solution.

Part III

Explain in brief

Question 1.
Define Alternative control flow statement.
Answer:
In alternative control flow, a condition of the state is tested, and if the condition is true, one statement is executed; if the condition is false, an alternative statement is executed.

Question 2.
Justify goat, grass, and wolf problem is algorithmic.
Answer:
goat, grass, and wolf problem:
A farmer wishes to take a goat, a grass bundle, and a wolf across a river. However, his boat can take only one of them at a time. So several trips are necessary across the river.

Moreover, the goat should not be left alone with the grass (otherwise, the goat would eat the grass), and the wolf should not be left alone with the goat (otherwise, the wolf would eat the goat).

How can the farmer achieve the task? Initially, we assume that all the four are at the same side of the river, and finally, all the four must be on the opposite side. The farmer must be in the boat when crossing the river.
A solution consists of a sequence of instructions indicating who or what should cross. Therefore, this is an algorithmic problem.

Question 3.
Write the Iterative control flow statement.
Answer:
In iterative control flow, a condition of the state is tested, and if the condition is true, a statement is executed. The two steps of testing the condition and executing the statement are repeated until the condition becomes false.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 4.
Explain variable.
Answer:
Variables are named boxes for storing data. When we do operations on data, we need to store the results in variables. The data stored in a variable is also known as the value of the variable.
We can store a value in a variable or change the value of a variable, using an assignment statement.

Question 5.
Write the following
(i) initial state
(ii) final state
Answer:
The values of the variables when the algorithm starts are known as the initial state, and the values of the variables when the algorithm finishes are known as the final state.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 6.
When functions are needed?
Answer:
Algorithms can become very complex. The variables of an algorithm and dependencies among the variables may be too many. Then, it is difficult to build algorithms correctly.
In such situations, we break an algorithm into parts, construct each part separately, and then integrate the parts to the complete algorithm. The parts of an algorithm are known as functions.

Question 7.
Give an example for a function?
Answer:
Suppose we want to calculate the surface area of a cylinder of radius r and height h.
A = 2 πr² + 2πrh
We can identify two functions, one for calculating the area of a circle and the other for the circumference of the circle.
If we abstract the two functions as circle_area(r) and circle_circumference(r), then,
cylinder_area (r, h) can be solved as:
cylinder_area (r, h) = 2 X circle_area (r) + circle_circumference (r) X h.

Question 8.
What are the basic principles and techniques for designing algorithms?
Answer:
The basic principles and techniques for designing algorithms are:

  • Specification.
  • Abstraction.
  • Composition.
  • Decomposition.

Question 9.
Write the specification format and explain.
Answer:
Specification format:
We can write the specification in a standard three-part format:

  • The name of the algorithm and the inputs.
  • Input: the property of the inputs.
  • Output: the desired input-output relation.

The first part is the name of the algorithm and the inputs. The second part is the property of the inputs. It is written as a comment which starts with – inputs: The third part is the desired input-output relation.
It is written as a comment which starts with — outputs: The input and output can be written using English and mathematical notation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 10.
Write the specification of an algorithm for computing the square root of a number.
Answer:

  • Let us name the algorithm square_root.
    it takes the number as the input. Let us name the input n. n should not be negative.
  • It produces the square root of n as the output. Let us name the output y. Then n should be the square of y.

Now the specification of the algorithm is
a) square_root (n).
b) inputs: n is a real number, n > 0.
c) outputs: y is a real number such that y 2= n.

Question 11.
Give an example for abstraction.
Answer:

  • A road map is designed for drivers. They do not usually worry about hills so most hills are ignored on a road map.
  • A walker’s map is not interested in whether a road is a one-way street, so such details are ignored.

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Explain the three control flow statement.
Answer:
There are three important control flow statements to alter the control flow depending on the state.

  1. In sequential control flow, a sequence of statements is executed one after another in the same order as they are written.
  2. In alternative control flow, a condition of the state is tested, and if the condition is true, one statement is executed; if the condition is false, an alternative statement is executed.
  3. In iterative control flow, a condition of the state is tested, and if the condition is true, a statement is executed. The two steps of testing the condition and executing the statement are repeated until the condition becomes false.

Question 2.
What are the uses of the Operating System?
Answer:
The basic principles and techniques for designing algorithms are;

  • Specification.
  • Abstraction.
  • Composition.
  • Decomposition.

Specification: The first step in problem-solving is to state the problem precisely. A problem is specified in terms of the input given and the output desired. The specification must also state the properties of the given input, and the relation between the input and the output.

Abstraction: A problem can involve a lot of details. Several of these details are unnecessary for solving the problem. Only a few details are essential. Ignoring or hiding unnecessary details and modeling an entity only by its essential properties is known as abstraction. For example, when we represent the state of a process, we select only the variables essential to the problem and ignore inessential details.

Composition: An algorithm is composed of assignment and control flow statements. A control flow statement tests a condition of the state and, depending on the value of the condition, decides the next statement to be executed.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Decomposition: We divide the main algorithm into functions. We construct each function independently of the main algorithm and other functions. Finally, we construct the main algorithm using the functions.

Question 3.
Explain the specification format.
Answer:
Specification format: We can write the specification in a standard three-part format:

  1. The name of the algorithm and the inputs
  2. Input: the property of the inputs
  3. Output: the desired input-output relation

The first part is the name of the algorithm and the inputs. The second part is the property of the inputs. It is written as a comment which starts with – inputs: The third part is the desired input-output relation. It is written as a comment which starts with outputs: The input and output can be written using English and mathematical notation.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction

Question 4.
Explain the state with a suitable example.
Answer:
State:
The state is a basic and important abstraction. Computational processes have stated. A computational process starts with an initial state. As actions are performed, its state changes. It ends with a final state.

The state of a process is abstracted by a set of variables in the algorithm. The state at any point of execution is simply the values of the variables at that point.

Example:
Chocolate Bars: A rectangular chocolate bar is divided into squares by horizontal and vertical grooves. We wish-to break the bar into individual squares.
To start with, we have the whole of the bar as a single piece. A cut is made by choosing a piece and breaking it along one of its grooves. Thus a cut divides a piece into two pieces. How many cuts are needed to break the bar into its individual squares? In this example, we will abstract the essential variables of the problem.

Essential variables:
The number of pieces and the number of cuts are the essential variables of the problem. We will represent them by two variables, p and c, respectively. Thus, the state of the process is abstracted by two variables p and c.

Irrelevant details:
The problem could be cutting a chocolate bar into individual pieces or cutting a sheet of postage stamps into individual stamps. It is irrelevant. The problem is simply cutting a grid of squares into individual squares.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 6 Specification and Abstraction 2

The sequence of cuts that have been made and the shapes and sizes of the resulting pieces are irrelevant too. From p and c, we cannot reconstruct the sizes of the individual pieces. But, that is irrelevant to solving the problem.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Pdf Chapter 10 Oscillations Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Solutions Chapter 10 Oscillations

11th Physics Guide Oscillations Book Back Questions and Answers

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

I. Multiple choice questions:

Question 1.
In a simple harmonic oscillation, the acceptation against displacement for one complete oscillation will be: (Model NSEP 2000 – 01)
(a) an ellipse
(b) a circle
(c) a parabola
(d) a straight line
Answer:
(d) a straight line

Hint:
The sketch between cause (magnitude of acceleration) and effect (magnitude of displacement) is a straight line.

Question 2.
A particle executing SHM crosses points A and B with the same velocity. Having taken 3 s in passing from A to B, it returns to B after another 3 s. The time period is:
(a) 15 s
(b) 6 s
(c) 12 s
(d) 9 s
Answer:
(c) 12 s

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 1
The time period is the time taken by a particle to return to B.

Question 3.
The length of a second’s pendulum on the surface of the Earth is 0.9 m. The length of the same pendulum on the surface of planet X such that the acceleration of the planet X is n times greater than the Earth is:
(a) 0.9 n
(b) \(\frac { 0.9 }{ n }\)m
(c) 0.9 n²m
(d) \(\frac{0.9}{n^{2}}\)
Answer:
(a) 0.9 n

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 2

Question 4.
A simple pendulum is suspended from the roof of a school bus which moves in a horizontal direction with an acceleration a, then the time period is:
(a) T ∝ \(\frac{1}{g^{2}+a^{2}}\)
(b) T ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{g^{2}+a^{2}}}\)
(c) T ∝ \(\sqrt{g^{2}+a^{2}}\)
(d) T ∝ (g² + a²)
Answer:
(b) T ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{g^{2}+a^{2}}}\)

Hint: T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)
When a bus is moving
g’ = \(\sqrt{g^{2}+a^{2}}\)
∴ T ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{g^{2}+a^{2}}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 5.
Two bodies A and B whose masses are in the rati0 1:2 are suspended from two separate massless springs of force constants kA and kB respectively. If the two bodies oscillate vertically such that their maximum velocities are in the ratio 1:2, the ratio of the amplitude A to that of B is:
(a) \(\sqrt{\frac{k_{\mathrm{B}}}{2 k_{\mathrm{A}}}}\)
(b) \(\sqrt{\frac{k_{\mathrm{B}}}{8 k_{\mathrm{A}}}}\)
(c) \(\sqrt{\frac{2k_{\mathrm{B}}}{ k_{\mathrm{A}}}}\)
(d) \(\sqrt{\frac{8k_{\mathrm{B}}}{ k_{\mathrm{A}}}}\)
Answer:
(b) \(\sqrt{\frac{k_{\mathrm{B}}}{8 k_{\mathrm{A}}}}\)

Hint: vA : vB
Amplitude of A : Amplitude of B = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{K}_{\mathrm{B}}}: \sqrt{8 \mathrm{~K}_{\mathrm{A}}}\)

Question 6.
A spring is connected to a mass m Suspended from it and its time period for vertical oscillation is T. The spring is now cut into two equal halves and the same mass is suspended from one of the halves. The period of vertical oscillation is:
(a) T’ = \(\sqrt{2}\)T
(b) T’ = \(\frac{\mathrm{T}}{\sqrt{2}}\)
(c) T’ = \(\sqrt{2T}\)
(d) T’ = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{T}}{2}}\)
Answer:
(b) T’ = \(\frac{\mathrm{T}}{\sqrt{2}}\)

Hint:
T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{m}}{k}}\)
When the spring is cut into two equal halves, then the force constant of each part is 2k.
When the mass is suspended from one of the halves.
Time period T’ = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{m}}{2k}}\)
= \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{T}}{2}}\)

Question 7.
The time period for small vertical oscillations of block of mass m when the masses of the pulleys are negligible and spring constant k1 and k2 is:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 3
(a) T = 4π\(\sqrt{m\left(\frac{1}{k_{1}}+\frac{1}{k_{2}}\right)}\)
(b) T = 2π\(\sqrt{m\left(\frac{1}{k_{1}}+\frac{1}{k_{2}}\right)}\)
(c) T = 4π\(\sqrt{m\left(k_{1}+k_{2}\right)}\)
(d) T = 2π\(\sqrt{m\left(k_{1}+k_{2}\right)}\)
Answer:
(a) T = 4π\(\sqrt{m\left(\frac{1}{k_{1}}+\frac{1}{k_{2}}\right)}\)

Hint:
T = 2π\(\frac { m }{ k }\)
The given arrangement is similar to the combination of springs in series.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 4

Question 8.
A simple pendulum has a time period T1. When its point of suspension is moved vertically upwards according as y = kt², where y is vertical distance covered and k = 1 ms-2, its time period becomes T2. Then, \(\frac{\mathrm{T}_{1}^{2}}{\mathrm{~T}_{2}^{2}}\) is (g = 10 ms-2
(a) \(\frac { 5 }{ 6 }\)
(b) \(\frac { 11 }{ 10 }\)
(c) \(\frac { 6 }{ 5 }\)
(d) \(\frac { 5 }{ 4 }\)
Answer:
(c) \(\frac { 6 }{ 5 }\)

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 5

Question 9.
An ideal spring of spring constant k, is suspended from the ceiling of a room and a block of mass m is fastened to its lower end. If the block is released when the spring is un-stretched, then the maximum extension in the spring is:
(a) 4\(\frac { mg }{ k }\)
(b) \(\frac { mg }{ k }\)
(c) 2\(\frac { mg }{ k }\)
(d) \(\frac { mg }{ 2k }\)
Answer:
(c) 2\(\frac { mg }{ k }\)

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 6

Question 10.
A pendulum is hung in a very high building oscillates to and fro motion freely like a simple harmonic oscillator. If the acceleration of the bob is 16 ms-2 at a distance of 4 m from the mean position, then the time period is: (NEET 2018 model)
(a) 2s
(b) 1s
(c) 2 πs
(d) πs
Answer:
(d) πs

Hint:
a = 16 m/s²; y = 4
a = – \(\frac { g }{ l }\)x = – ω²x
16 = \(\left|1-\omega^{2} \times 4\right|\)
∴ ω² = \(\frac { 16 }{ 4 }\) = 4
ω = 2
Time period T = \(\frac { 2π }{ ω }\) = πs

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 11.
A hollow sphere is filled with water. It is hung by a long thread. As the water flows out of a hole at the bottom, the period of oscillation will:
(a) first increase and then decrease
(b) first decrease and then increase
(c) increase continuously
(d) decrease continuously
Answer:
(a) first increase and then decrease

Hint:
As the water flows out of the sphere, the time period first increases and then decreases. Initially, when the sphere is completely filled with water its centre of gravity (C.G) lies at its centre. As water flows out, the C.G begins to shift below the centre of the sphere.

The effective length of the pendulum increases and hence time period increases. When the sphere becomes more than half empty, its C.G begins to rise up. The effective length of the pendulum decreases and T decreases.

Question 12.
The damping force on an oscillator is directly proportional to the velocity. The units of the constant of proportionality are: (AIPMT 2012)
(a) kg m s-1
(b) kg m s-2
(c) kg s-1
(d) kg s
Answer:
(c) kg s-1

Hint:
Fd ∝ v
Fd = – bv
Fd = kv
∴ k = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}_{d}}{\nu}\)
Units of k = \(\frac{\mathrm{kgms}^{-2}}{\mathrm{~m} / \mathrm{s}}\)
= kg-1
Units of proportionality constant = kgs-1

Question 13.
When a damped harmonic oscillator completes 100 oscillations, its amplitude is reduced to\(\frac { 1 }{ 3 }\) of its initial value. What will be its amplitude when it completes 200 oscillations?
(a) \(\frac { 1 }{ 5 }\)
(b) \(\frac { 2 }{ 3 }\)
(c) \(\frac { 1 }{ 6 }\)
(d) \(\frac { 1 }{ 9 }\)
Answer:
(b) \(\frac { 2 }{ 3 }\)

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 7

Question 14.
Which of the following differential equations represents a damped harmonic oscillator?
(a) \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + y = 0
(b) \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + γ \(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) + y = 0
(c) \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + k²y = 0
(d) \(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) + y = 0
Answer:
(b) \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + γ \(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) + y = 0

Hint:
For a damped oscillator F ∝ v
Total restoring force F = – ky – bv
b – damping constant; y – displacement
If F = – ky – by
then m\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) = – ky – b\(\frac { dy }{ dt }\)
m\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + ky + b\(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) = 0
÷ m we get
\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + \(\frac { b }{ m }\)\(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) + \(\frac { k }{ m }\)y = 0
If k = m and \(\frac { b }{ m }\) = r
then the equation becomes
\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) + r\(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) + y = 0

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 15.
If the inertial mass and gravitational mass of the simple pendulum of length l are not equal, then the time period of the simple pendulum is:
(a) T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m_{i} l}{m_{g} g}}\)
(b) T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m_{g} l}{m_{i} g}}\)
(c) T = 2π\(\frac{m_{g}}{m_{i}} \sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)
(d) T = 2π\(\frac{m_{i}}{m_{g}} \sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)
Answer:
(a) T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m_{i} l}{m_{g} g}}\)

Hint:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 8

II. Short Answers Questions:

Question 1.
What is meant by periodic and non-periodic motion? Give any two examples, for each motion.
Answer:
Periodic motion: Any motion which repeats itself in a fixed time interval is known as periodic motion. Examples: Hands in a pendulum clock, the swing of a cradle.
Non-Periodic motion: Any motion which does not repeat itself after a regular interval of time is known as non-periodic motion. Example: Occurrence of Earthquake, the eruption of a volcano.

Question 2.
What is meant by the force constant of a spring?
Answer:
Force constant is defined as force per unit length.

Question 3.
Define the time period of simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
The time period is defined as the time taken by a particle to complete one oscillation. It is usually denoted by T.

Question 4.
Define frequency of simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
The number of oscillations produced by the particle per second is called frequency. It is denoted by f. SI unit for frequency is s-1 or hertz (Hz).
Mathematically, frequency is related to time period by f = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{T}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 5.
What is an epoch?
Answer:
Initial phases of a particle is an epoch. At time t = 0 s (initial time), the phase φ = (φ0 is called epoch (initial phase) where φ0 is called the angle of epoch.

Question 6.
Write short notes on two springs connected in series.
Answer:
Let us consider two springs whose spring constant are k1 and k2 and which are connected to a mass m as shown in Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 9
Let F be the applied force towards right as shown in Figure. The net displacement of the mass point is
x = x1 + x2
From Hooke’s law, the net force,
F = – ks(x1 + x2)
The effective spring constant can be calculated as
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 11
When n springs connected in series, the effective spring constant in series is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 12
If all spring constants are identical
i.e., k1 = k2 = … = kn = k then
\(\frac{1}{k_{s}}\) = \(\frac { n }{ k }\) ⇒ ks = \(\frac { k }{ n }\)
This means that the effective spring constant reduces by the factor n. So, for springs in series connection, the effective spring constant is lesser than the individual spring constants.

Question 7.
Write short notes on two springs connected in parallel.
Answer:
Let us consider only two springs of spring constants k1 and k2 attached to a mass m as shown in Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 13
Net force for the displacement of mass m is F = – kpx … (1)
Where kp is called effective spring constant. Let the first spring be elongated by a displacement x due to force F1 and the second spring be elongated by the same displacement x due to force F2, then the net force
F = – k1x – k2x … (2)
Equating equations (2) and (1), we get
kp = k1 + k2 … (3)
Generalizing, for n springs connected in parallel,
kp = \(\sum_{i=1}^{n} k_{i}\) … (4)
If all spring constants are identical i.e., k1 = k2 = … = kn = k then
kp = nk … (5)
It is implied that the effective spring constant increases by a factor n. So, for the springs in parallel connection, the effective spring constant is greater than the individual spring constant.

Question 8.
Write down the time period of simple pendulum.
Answer:
T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\) in second.
where l – length of the pendulum.
g – acceleration due to gravity.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 9.
State the laws of simple pendulum.
Answer:
Laws of simple pendulum: The time period of a simple pendulum.

Depends on the following laws:
(i) Law of length: For a given value of acceleration due to gravity, the time period of a simple pendulum is directly proportional to the square root of length of the pendulum.
T ∝ \(\sqrt{l}\) … (1)

(ii) Law of acceleration: For a fixed length, the time period of a simple pendulum is inversely proportional to the square root of acceleration due to gravity.
T ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{g}}\) … (2)

Question 10.
Write down the equation of time period for linear harmonic oscillator.
Answer:
Time period T = \(\frac { 1 }{ f }\) = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\)s
where m is the mass, k is the spring constant.

Question 11.
What is meant by free oscillation?
Answer:
The oscillations in which the amplitude decreases gradually with the passage of time are called damped Oscillations.
Example:

  1. The oscillations of a pendulum or pendulum oscillating inside an oil-filled container.
  2. Electromagnetic oscillations in a tank circuit.
  3. Oscillations in a dead beat and ballistic galvanometers.

Question 12.
Explain damped oscillation. Give an example.
Answer:
If an oscillator oscillates in a resistive medium, then its amplitude goes on decreasing. The motion of the oscillator is called damped oscillation.
Example:

  • The oscillations of a pendulum (including air friction) or pendulum oscillating inside an oil-filled container.
  • Electromagnetic oscillations in a tank circuit.

Question 13.
Define forced oscillation. Give an example.
Answer:
The body executing vibration initially vibrates with its natural frequency and due to the presence of external periodic force, the body later vibrates with the frequency of the applied periodic force. Such vibrations are known as forced vibrations.
Example: Soundboards of stringed instruments.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 14.
What is meant by maintained oscillation? Give an example.
Answer:
To avoid damping in an oscillation, energy is supplied from an external source, the amplitude of the oscillation can be made constant. Such vibrations are known as maintained vibrations.

Example:
The vibration of a tuning fork getting energy from a battery or from an external power supply.

Question 15.
Explain resonance. Give an example.
Answer:
The frequency of external periodic force (or driving force) matches with the natural frequency of the vibrating body (driven). As a result, the oscillating body begins to vibrate such that its amplitude increases at each step and ultimately it has a large amplitude. Such a phenomenon is known as resonance and the corresponding vibrations are known as resonance vibrations. Example: The breaking of glass due to sound

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

III. Long Answers Questions:

Question 1.
What is meant by simple harmonic oscillation? Give examples and explain why every simple harmonic motion is a periodic motion whereas the converse need not be true.
Answer:
Simple harmonic motion is a special type of oscillatory motion in which the acceleration or force on the particle is directly proportional to its displacement from a fixed point and is always directed towards that fixed point.

Example: Oscillation of a pendulum. SHM is a special type of periodic motion, where restoring force is proportional to the displacement and acts in the direction opposite to displacement.

Question 2.
Describe Simple Harmonic Motion as a projection of uniform circular motion.
Answer:
(i) Let us consider a particle of mass m moving with uniform speed v along the circumference of a circle whose radius is r in an anti-clockwise direction (as shown in Figure).

(ii) It is assumed that the origin of the coordinate System coincides with the center 0 of the circle.

(iii) If co is the angular velocity of the particle and 0 the angular displacement of the particle at any instant of time t, then θ = ωt. By projecting the uniform circular motion on its diameter a simple harmonic motion is obtained.

(iv) This means that we can associate a map (or a relationship) between uniform circular (or revolution) motion to vibratory motion.

(v) Conversely, any vibratory motion or revolution can be mapped to uniform circular motion. The position of a particle moving is projected on to its vertical diameter or on to a line parallel to vertical diameter.

(vi) Similarly, we can do it for horizontal axis or a line parallel to the horizontal axis.

Example: Let us consider a spring-mass system (or oscillation of pendulum) as shown in Figure. When the spring moves up and down (or pendulum moves to and fro), the motion of the mass or bob is mapped to points on the circular motion.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 14
Thus, if a particle undergoes uniform circular motion then the projection of the particle on the diameter of the circle (or on a line parallel to the diameter) traces straight line motion that is simple harmonic in nature. The circle is known as the reference circle of the simple harmonic motion.

Question 3.
What is meant by angular harmonic oscillation? Compute the time period of angular harmonic oscillation.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 15
If a body is allowed to rotate freely about a given axis then the oscillation is known as the angular oscillation. The point at which the resultant torque acting on the body is taken to be zero. It is called mean position. If the body is displaced from the mean position, then the resultant torque acts such that it is proportional to the angular displacement. This torque has a tendency to bring the body towards the mean position.

Time period : Let \(\overline{θ}\) be the angular displacement of the body and the resultant torque \(\vec { τ }\) acting on the body is,
\(\vec { τ }\) ∝ \(\vec {θ}\) … (1)
\(\vec { τ }\) = – k\(\vec {θ}\) … (2)
K is the restoring torsion constant, that is torque per unit angular displacement. If I is the moment of inertia of the body and \(\vec { τ }\) ∝ \(\vec {α}\) is the angular acceleration then
\(\vec { τ }\) = I \(\vec{α}\) = k \(\vec {θ}\)
But \(\vec{α}\) = \(\frac{d^{2} \vec{\theta}}{d t^{2}}\) and therefore
\(\frac{d^{2} \vec{\theta}}{d t^{2}}\) = – \(\frac { k }{ I }\)\(\vec {θ}\) … (3)
This differential equation resembles simple harmonic differential equation.
By comparing equation (3) with simple harmonic motion given we get,
a = \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) = – ω²y, we have
ω = \(\sqrt{\frac{k}{I}}\) rads-1 … (4)
The frequency of the angular harmonic motion is given equation ω = 2πf is
f = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2π }\) \(\sqrt{\frac{k}{I}}\)Hz … (5)
The time period is given equation is
T = \(\frac { 1 }{ f }\); T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{I}{k}}\) second
In angular simple harmonic motion, the displacement of the particle is measured in terms of angular displacement \(\vec {θ}\).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 4.
Write down the difference between simple harmonic motion angular simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
Comparison of simple harmonic motion and angular simple harmonic motion.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 16

Question 5.
Discuss the simple pendulum in detail.
Answer:
Construction:
A pendulum is a mechanical system which exhibits periodic motion. It has a bob with mass m suspended by a massless and inextensible string. The other end is fixed on a stand as shown in Figure (a). At equilibrium, the pendulum does not oscillate and is suspended vertically downward.

Such a position is known as mean position or equilibrium position. When a pendulum is displaced through a small displacement from its equilibrium position and released, the bob of the pendulum executes to and fro motion.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 17
Calculation of time period: Let l be the length of the pendulum which is taken as the distance between the point of suspension and the centre of gravity of the bob. Two forces act on the bob of the pendulum at any displaced position, as shown in Figure (d),

  • The gravitational force acting on the body (F = mg) acts vertically downwards.
  • The tension in the string T acts along the string to the point of suspension.

Resolving the gravitational force into its components:

  • Normal component: It is along the string but in opposition to the direction of tension, Fas = mg cosθ.
  • Tangential component: It is perpendicular to the string i.e., along the tangential direction of arc of the swing, Fps = mg sinθ.

Hence, the normal component of the force is, along the string,
T – Was = m\(\frac{v^{2}}{l}\)
Here v is speed of bob
T – mg cosθ = m\(\frac{v^{2}}{l}\) … (1)
From the Figure, it is observed that the tangential component Wps of the gravitational force always points towards the equilibrium position. This direction always points opposite to the direction of displacement of the bob from the mean position. Hence, in this case, the tangential force is the restoring force. Applying Newton’s second law along tangential direction, we have
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 18
Where, s is the position of bob that is measured along the arc. Expressing arc length in terms of angular displacement i.e.,
s = lθ … (3)
Then its acceleration,
\(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) = \(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) … (4)
Substituting equation (4) in equation (2), we get,
l\(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) = – g sin θ
\(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) = – \(\frac { g }{ l }\) sin θ … (5)
Because of the presence of sinθ in the above differential equation, it is a nonlinear differential equation. It is assumed that “the small oscillation approximation”, sin θ ≈ θ, the above differential equation becomes linear differential equation.
\(\frac{d^{2} \theta}{d t^{2}}\) = – \(\frac { g }{ l }\) θ
It is known as oscillatory differential equation. Hence, the angular frequency of this oscillator (natural frequency of this system) is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 19

Question 6.
Explain the horizontal oscillations of a spring.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 20
Let us consider a system containing a block of mass m fastened to a massless spring with stiffness constant or force constant or spring constant k placed on a smooth horizontal surface (frictionless surface) as shown in Figure. Let x0 be the equilibrium position or mean position of mass m when it is left undisturbed.

When the mass is displaced through a small displacement x towards right from its equilibrium position and then released, it will oscillate back and forth about its mean position x0. Let F be the restoring force (due to stretching of the spring) that is proportional to the amount of displacement of block: For one-dimensional motion, we get
F ∝ x
F = – kx
where negative sign implies that the restoring force will always act opposite to the direction of the displacement. This equation is called Hooke’s law. It is noticed that, the restoring force is linear with the displacement (i.e., the exponent of force and displacement are unity). This is not always true. If we apply a very large stretching force, then the amplitude of oscillations becomes very large.
m\(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) = – kx
\(\frac{d^{2} x}{d t^{2}}\) = – \(\frac { k }{ m }\)x … (1)
Comparing the equation (1) with simple harmonic motion equation a = \(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) = – ω²y, we get
ω² = \(\frac { k }{ m }\)
which means the angular frequency or natural frequency of the oscillator is
ω = \(\sqrt{\frac{k}{m}}\)rad s-1 … (2)
The frequency of the oscillation is
f = \(\frac { ω }{ 2π }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2π }\)\(\frac { k }{ m }\) Hertz … (3)
and the time period of the oscillation is
T = \(\frac { 1 }{ f }\) = 2π[/latex]\(\frac { m }{ k }\) seconds … (4)

Question 7.
Describe the vertical oscillations of a spring.
Answer:
Consider a massless spring with stiffness constant or force constant k attached to a ceiling as shown in Figure. Let the length of the spring before loading mass m be L. If the block of mass m is attached to the other end of the spring, then the spring elongates by a length l. Let F1 be the restoring force due to the stretching of spring. Due to mass m, the gravitational force acts vertically downward. A free-body diagram is drawn for this system as shown in Figure. When the system is under equilibrium,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 21
F1 + mg = 0 … (1)
But the spring elongates by small displacement l,
∴ F1 ∝ l ⇒ F1 = – kl … (2)
Substituting equation (2) in equation (1), we get
– kl + mg = 0
mg = kl
(or) \(\frac { m }{ k }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ g }\) … (3)
Suppose a very small external force is applied on the mass such that the mass further displaces downward by a displacement y, then it will oscillate up and down. Now, the restoring force due to this stretching of spring (total extension of spring is y + l) is
F2 (y + 1)
F2 = – k(y + 1) = – ky – kl … (4)
Since, the mass moves up and down with acceleration , by drawing the free body diagram for this case, we get
-ky – kl + mg = m\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) … (5)
The net force acting on the mass due to this stretching is
F = F2 + mg
F = – ky – kl + mg … (6)
The gravitational force opposes the restoring force. Substituting equation (3) in equation (6), we get
F = – ky – kl + kl = ky
Time period:
Applying Newton’s law, we get
m\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) = – ky
\(\frac{d^{2} y}{d t^{2}}\) = – \(\frac { k }{ m }\)y … (7)
The above equation is in the form of simple harmonic differential equation. Hence the time period is
T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\)second … (8)
The time period can be rewritten using equation (3) as
T = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\) = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g}}\)second.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 8.
Write short notes on the oscillations of the liquid column in U-tube.
Answer:
Let us consider a U-shaped glass tube which consists of two open arms with uniform cross¬sectional area A. Let us pour a non-viscous uniform incompressible liquid of density p in the U-shaped tube to a height h as shown in the Figure. If the liquid and tube are not disturbed then the liquid surface will be in equilibrium position O.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 22
It means the pressure as measured at any point on the liquid is the same and also at the surface on the arm (edge of the tube on either side), that balances the atmospheric pressure. Hence, the level of liquid in each arm will be the same. By blowing air one can provide sufficient force in one arm, and the liquid gets disturbed from equilibrium position O, It is meant, that pressure at blown arm is higher than the other arm.

A difference in pressure is created that will cause the liquid to oscillate for a very short duration of time about the mean or equilibrium position. Finally, it comes to rest.
Time period of the oscillation is
T= 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{l}{2g}}\)second

Question 9.
Discuss in detail the energy in simple harmonic motion.
Answer:
(i) Expression for Potential Energy:For the simple harmonic motion, the force and the displacement are related by Hooke’s law
\(\vec { F }\) = – k\(\vec { r }\)
F = – kx … (1)
the work done by the conservative force field is independent of path.
Calculation potential energy:
F = \(\frac { dU }{ dx }\) … (2)
Comparing (1) and (2), we get
\(\frac { dU }{ dx }\) = – kx
dU = – kx dx
This work done by the force F during a small displacement dx stores as potential energy
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 23
From equation,
ω = \(\sqrt{\frac{k}{m}}\) rad s-1
By substituting the value of force constant k = mω² in equation (3), we get
U(x) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²x² … (4)
where ω is the natural frequency of the oscillating system. For the particle executing simple harmonic motion from the equation,
y = A sin ωt
we get,
x = A sin ωt
U(t) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²x² … (5)
This variation of U is shown below.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 24

(ii) Expression for Kinetic Energy:
Kinetic energy
KE = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mvx² = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)m(\(\frac { dx }{ dt }\))² … (6)
Since the particle executes simple harmonic motion, from equation y = A sin ωt
x = A sin ωt
∴ velocity is
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 25

(iii) Expression for Total Energy: Total energy is the sum of kinetic energy and potential energy.
E = KE + U … (11)
E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²(A² – x²) + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²x² … (12)
Hence, cancelling x² term,
E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²x² = r constant … (13)
Alternatively, from equation (5) and equation (10), we get the total energy as
E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²x² sin²ωt + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A²cos²ωt
= \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A² (sin²ωt + cos²ωt)
From trigonometry identity,
(sin² ωt + cos² ωt) = 1
E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A² = constant
which gives the law of conservation of total energy.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 26

Question 10.
Explain in detail the four different types of oscillations.
Answer:
(i) Free oscillations: When the oscillator oscillates with a frequency that is equal to the natural frequency of the oscillator. Such an oscillation or vibration is known as free oscillation or free vibration.

Example:

  • Oscillation of a simple pendulum,
  • Vibration in a stretched string.

(ii) Damped oscillation: If an oscillator oscillates in a resistive medium, then its amplitude goes on decreasing. The energy of the oscillator is used to do work against the resistive medium. The motion of the oscillator is said to be a damped oscillation.

Example:

  • The oscillations of a pendulum (including air friction) or pendulum oscillating inside an oil filled container.
  • Electromagnetic oscillations in a tank circuit.

(iii) Forced oscillations: In this type of vibration, the body executing vibration initially vibrates with its natural frequency. Because of the presence of external periodic force, the body later vibrates with the frequency of the applied periodic force. Such vibrations are known as forced vibrations.

Example:
Soundboards of stringed instruments.

(iv) Maintained oscillations: The amplitude of the oscillation can be made constant. By supplying energy from an external source. Such oscillations are known as maintained oscillations.

Example:
The vibration of a tuning fork getting energy from a battery or from external power supply.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

IV. Numerical Problems:

Question 1.
Consider the Earth as a homogeneous sphere of radius R and a straight hole is bored in it through its centre. Show that a particle dropped into the hole will execute a simple harmonic motion such that its time Period is T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{R}}{g}}\)
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 27
(Here, negative has no meaning. It can be neglected)
Comparing equation (1) & (2) we get,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 28
Time period, T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{R}}{g}}\)
Hence proved.

Question 2.
Calculate the time period of the oscillation of a particle of mass m moving in the potential defined as
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 29
In the problem consider oscillation of particle into 2 cases via x < 0 (consider it as SHM where the time period is considered as t1) and another one as x > 0 (consider it as a motion under gravity, where time period is t2)

Note:
We want to find the total time period, which will be T = t1 + t2.
According to the conservation of energy
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 30
In case: 2 (Motion under gravity)
t2 = \(\frac { 2v }{ g }\) substituting equation (2) here we get,
t2 = \(\frac { 2 }{ g }\)\(\sqrt{\frac{2 E}{m}}\)
⇒ 2\(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{E}}{m g^{2}}}\) … (4)
Adding equation (3) & (4)
Time period of oscillation,
T = t1 + t2
= π\(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\) + 2\(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{E}}{m g^{2}}}\)

Question 3.
Consider a simple pendulum of length l = 0.9 m which is properly placed on a trolley rolling down on a inclined plane which is at θ = 45° with the horizontal. Assuming that the inclined plane is frictionless, calculate the time period of oscillation of the simple pendulum.
Answer:
The effective value of acceleration due to gravity (g) will be equal to the component of g normal to the inclined plane which is
g’ = g cos α
T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g^{\prime}}}\) = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{l}{g \cos \theta}}\)
Length of the pendulum l = 0.9m
Angle of inclination θ = 45°
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 31

Question 4.
A piece of wood of mass m is floating erect in a liquid whose density is ρ. If it is slightly pressed down and released, then executes simple harmonic motion. Show that its time period of oscillation is T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m}{\mathrm{Ag} \rho}}\)
Answer:
When a wood is pressed and released,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 32

Question 5.
Consider two simple harmonic motion along x and y-axis having same frequencies but different amplitudes as x = A sin (ωt + φ) (along x axis) and y = B sin ωt (along y axis). Then show that \(\frac{x^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}^{2}}+\frac{y^{2}}{\mathrm{~B}^{2}}-\frac{2 x y}{\mathrm{AB}}\) cosφ = sin²φ and also discuss the special cases when
(i) φ = 0
(ii) φ = π
(iii) φ = \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\)
(iv) φ = \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\) and A = B
(v) φ = \(\frac { π }{ 4 }\)
Note: when a particle is subjected to two simple harmonic motions at right angle to each other the particle may move along different paths. Such paths are called Lissajous figures.
Given:
x = A sin(ωt-φ) … (1)
y = B sin ωt … (2)
In equation (1) use,
sin (A – B) – sin A cos B + cos A sin B
(1) ⇒ x – A sin ωt. cos (φ) + A cos ωt. sinφ
x – A sin cat. cos φ = A cos cot sin φ
squaring on both sides we get,
(x – A sin cot. cos φ)² = A² cos²cot sin²φ … (3)
In equation (3) sin at can be re-written as, \(\frac { y }{ B }\) [from equation (2)]. Also, use
cos²cot = 1 – sin²ωt in equation (3)
∴ (3) becomes
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 34
Hence proved.

Special cases:
(i) φ = 0 in equation (5) we get,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 35
The above equation resembles equation of a straight line passing through origin with positive slope.

(ii) φ = π in equation (5)
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 36
The above equation is an equation of a straight line passing through origin with a negative slope.

(iii) φ = \(\frac { π }{ 2 }\) in equation (5)
The above equation of an ellipse whose centre is origin.

(iv) φ = \(\frac { π }{ B }\) and A = B in equation (5)
\(\frac{x^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}^{2}}+\frac{y^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}^{2}}\) = 1
⇒ x² + y² = A²
The above equation of a circle whose centre is origin.

(v) φ = \(\frac { π }{ 4 }\), cos \(\frac { π }{ 4 }\) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\) sin\(\frac { π }{ 4 }\) = \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\) equation (5) we get,
\(\frac{x^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}^{2}}+\frac{y^{2}}{\mathrm{~A}^{2}}\) – \(\frac{(\sqrt{2}) x y}{A B}\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)
The above equation is an equation of tilted ellipse.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Question 6.
Show that for a particle executing simple harmonic motion,
(a) the average value of kinetic energy is equal to the average value of potential energy,
(b) average potential energy = average kinetic energy = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) (total energy)
Hint: average kinetic energy = < kinetic energy > = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}} \int_{0}^{\mathrm{T}}(\text { Potential energy }) d t\) and average potential energy = < potential energy > = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~T}} \int_{0}^{\mathrm{T}}(\text { Potential energy }) d t\)
Answer:
(a) Suppose a particle of mass m executes SHM of time period T. The displacement of the particle at any instant t is given by
y = A sin ωr … (1)
Velocity v = \(\frac { dy }{ dt }\) = \(\frac { d }{ dt }\)(sin ωt) = Aω cos ωt = ωA cosωt
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 37
Average potential energy over a period of oscillation is,
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 38

(b) Total energy
T.E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) ω²y² + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²(A² – y²)
But y = A sinωt
T.E = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A² ωt + \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A² cos²ωt
= \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\)mω²A²(sin²ωt + cos²ωt)
From trignometry identity
sin² ωt + cos² ωt = 1
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 39

Question 7.
Compute the time period for the following system if the block of mass m is slightly displaced vertically down from its equilibrium position and then released. Assume that the pulley is light and smooth, strings and springs are light.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations 40
Case (a):
When mass is slightly displaced vertically down: Now pulley is fixed rigidly here. When the mass is displaced by y and the spring will also be stretched by y.
Hence F = ky
Time period T = \(\sqrt{\frac{m}{k}}\)

case (b):
When the system is released: WTien mass is displaced by y, pulley is also displaced by 4y,
∴ F = 4 Icy
∴ T = 2π\(\sqrt{\frac{m}{4k}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Physics Guide Chapter 10 Oscillations

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

11th Computer Science Guide Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the correct answer.

Question 1.
From the options given below, choose the operations managed by the operating system.
a) Memory
b) Processor
c) I/O devices
d) all of the above
Answer:
d) all of the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 2.
Which is the default folder for many Windows Applications to save your file?
a) My Document
b) My Pictures
c) Documents and Settings
d) My Computer
Answer:
a) My Document

Question 3.
Under which of the following OS, the option Shift + Delete – permanently delete a file or folder?
a) Windows 7
b) Windows 8
c) Windows 10
d) None of the OS
Answer:
a) Windows 7

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 4.
What is the meaning of “Hibernate” in Windows XP/Windows 7?
a) Restart the Computer in safe mode
b) Restart the Computer in hibernate mode
c) Shutdown the Computer terminating a!! the running applications
d) Shutdown the Computer without closing the running applications
Answer:
d) Shutdown the Computer without closing the running applications

Question 5.
Which of the following OS is not based on Linux?
a) Ubuntu
b) Redhat
c) CentOs
d) BSD
Answer:
d) BSD

Question 6.
Which of the following in Ubuntu OS is used to view the options for the devices installed?
a) Settings
b) Files
c) Dash
d) VBox_GAs_5.2.2
Answer:
b) Files

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 7.
Identify the default email client in Ubuntu.
a) Thunderbird
b) Firefox
c) Internet Explorer
d) Chrome
Answer:
a) Thunderbird

Question 8.
Which is the default application for spreadsheets in Ubuntu? This is available in the software launcher.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOffice Calc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) LibreOffice Spreadsheet
Answer:
b) LibreOffice Calc

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 9.
Which is the default browser for Ubuntu?
a) Firefox
b) Internet Explorer
c) Chrome
d) Thunderbird
Answer:
a) Firefox

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 10.
Where will you select the option to log out, suspend, restart, or shut down from the desktop of Ubuntu OS?
a) Session Indicator
b) Launcher
c) Files
d) Search
Answer:
a) Session Indicator

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
Differentiate cut and copy options.
Answer:

COPYCUT
Copy text will leave the source as it is and place a copy in the destination.Move text will shift the source to the destination i.e., the text will change its position.
After the copy, the text available in both source and destination locations.After the move, the text available in the destination location alone.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 2.
What is the use of a file extension?
Answer:
File Extension is the second part of the file name. It succeeds the decimal point in the file name. It is used to identify the type of file and it is normally upto 3 to 4 characters long.
Example: exe, html.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 3.
Differentiate Files and Folders.
Answer:

FilesFolders
The files store data of any kind.The folders store files and other sub-folders.
Information stored in the computer only in the form of file.The folders often referred to as directories, are used to organize files on your computer.

Question 4.
Differentiate Save and Save As option.
Answer:

SaveSave As
The save command automatically saves the file using the same name, format and location, as when it was last saved or opened from. Save command opens a dialog box only first time saved.The save as command opens a dialog box every time in which the user can change the name of the file, the format, as well as the location of where the file is saved if needed.

Question 5.
What is open source?
Answer:
Open source refers to a program or software in which the source code is available in the web to all public, without any cost.

Question 6.
What are the advantages of open source?
Answer:
The reasons individuals or organizations choose open source software are:

  1. lower cost
  2. security
  3. no vendor ‘lock-in’
  4. better quality

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 7.
Mention the different server distributions in Linux OS.
Answer:
The server distribution in Linux OS:

  1. Ubuntu Linux
  2. Linux Mint
  3. Arch Linux
  4. Deepin
  5. Fedora
  6. Debian
  7. Centos

Question 8.
How will you log off from Ubuntu OS?
Answer:
When you have finished working on your computer, you can choose to Log Out through the Session Indicator on the far right side of the top panel.

Part – III

Explain in brief

Question 1.
Analyse: Why the drives are segregated?
Answer:

  1. It saves space and increases system performance.
  2. Sharing and protection.
  3. Segment and segregate the data to defend it from cyber-attacks.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 2.
If you are working on multiple files at a time, sometimes the system may hang. What is the reason behind it. How can you reduce it?
Answer:
Too Many Applications Running :
Each application open on the system takes some internal and hardware resources to keep it running. If multiple apps and programs are running, your PC may run low on resources as memory is used by a number of applications.

Device Driver Issues:
Outdated or damaged drivers can also be the reason behind frequent computer freezes. If video drivers being installed on your system are not updated, the computer might hang up while you attempt to play a video or game on the system.

Operating System Issues:
To ensure the smooth functioning of the machine, make sure that all updates are installed. To be able to keep the system updated, it is vital that you use a legal copy of the operating system.

Excess Heating Up:
If the temperature of your system processor is higher than usual, the chances are that the computer may freeze.

Hardware Misconfigyratioo:
One major reason behind the computer freeze issue is hardware misconfiguration, This may have occurred due to misconfigured hardware component that you recently added to the computer. Alternatively, the hardware component you added recently may be incompatible with the computer.

Question 3.
Are drives such as hard drive and floppy drives represented with drive letters? If so why, if not why?
Answer:
Yes, hard drives and floppy drives are represented with drive letters.
A: drive is used for floppy disk of 3.5 inches and storage capacity of 1.44 MB.
B: drive is for floppy of size 5.25 inches and of storage capacity of 1.2 MB
So, we can say like
A: First Floppy Drive
B: Second Floppy Drive
C: D : E: …………….. Z: Hard Disk Drives, CD/DVD

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 4.
Write the specific use of Cortana.
Answer:
Cortana is your personal digital assistant on Windows 10 to help you find virtually anything on your device, track your packages and flights, inform you about weather and traffic information, manage your calendar and create reminders, and it can even tell you jokes.

Question 5.
List out the major differences between Windows and Ubuntu OS.
Answer:

WindowsUbuntu
Windows NT’ is the kernel used in WindowsLinux is the kernel used in Ubuntu
Needs to pay for WindowsIt is completely free and available as open-source
It support executable files (.exe), Virus threatening existsIt does not support executable files (.exe) so, mostly it is virus-free OS
Desktop OS does not support serverDesktop OS can also work as a server
It does not support multiple desktop environmentsIt supports multiple desktop environments
Installation is very simpleInstallation is quite complex process
Separately install MS Office in WindowsOS comes with many useful software like Office
It does not have own software managerIt has its own software manager
Software installation does that by simple installation package and instructions.It normally installs the software and tools by terminal
User friendlyIt is not user friendly

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 6.
Are there any difficulties you face while using Ubuntu? If so, mention it with reasons.
Answer:

  1. Ubuntu has less hardware support for commercial/industrial/medical/ logistical therefore it’s less voted for use in big-time backends.
  2. Ubuntu doesn’t support middlewares such as C panel, cloud Linux and a plethora of other infrastructure or monitoring tools.
  3. Hard to install graphic drivers especially for old hardware. It is not possible to play modern games, because of poor graphics quality.
  4. The user switching from windows will not like the user experience on Ubuntu and will have difficulty in operating the OS.
  5. Ubuntu is not capable of playing MP3 files by default.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 7.
Differentiate Thunderbird and Firefox in Ubuntu OS.
Answer:

  • Firefox is a browser is access the internet.
  • Thunderbird is an email client. We can install it on our computer and view our emails.
  • Both Firefox and Thunderbird are Mozilla products.

Question 8.
Differentiate Save, Save As, and Save a Copy in Ubuntu OS.
Answer:
Save: This will save the document without asking for a new name or location. It will overwrite the original.

Save As: This will prompt you to save the document using a dialog box. You will have the ability to change the file name and/or location.

Save A Copy: This will prompt you to save a ‘copy’ using the same dialog box as ‘save as’. You will have the ability to change the file name and/or location. If you choose the same file name and location it will overwrite the original.

If you changed the name or location of the document you will be working on the original document, not the copy. This means that if you make additional changes and then hit save the original will be overwritten with the new changes, but the copy you saved earlier will be left at the state of the Save A Copy.

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Explain the versions of the Windows Operating System.
Answer:
Versions of Windows Operating System
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 1
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 2
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 3
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 4
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 5
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 6

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 2.
Draw and compare the scan equivalence in Windows and Ubuntu.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 7
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 8

Question 3.
Complete the following matrix.

Navigational methodLocated onIdeally suited for
Start buttonTaskbar
DesktopExploring your disk drives and using system tools
Windows

Explorer

Seeing hierarchy of ail computer contents and resources in one window.
Quick Launch

Answer:

Navigational methodLocated onIdeally suited for
Start buttonTaskbarTo open the applications
My ComputerDesktopExploring your disk drives and using system tools
Windows ExplorerStart ButtonSeeing hierarchy of all computer contents and resources in one window.
Quick LaunchTaskbarTo quickly launch programs that we place in it

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 4.
Observe the figure and mark all the window elements. Identify the version of the Windows OS.
Answer:
The element of a windows
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 9 Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 10
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 5.
Write the procedure to create, rename, delete and save a file in Ubuntu OS. Compare it with Windows OS.
Answer:
The procedure to create, rename, delete and save a file in Ubuntu OS

Creating Files:

  • We can create the files with the same procedure by clicking the Files icon,
  • The following Figure shows the method of creating a File by right-clicking on the Desktop,

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 12

A new File can also be created by using File menu.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 13

Deleting a File: A file created by us can be moved to trash by using right-click or by using the menu.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 14

Deleting a File: Deleting a File by using the Edit menu.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 15

Rename a file:

  • Select the file.
  • Right dick on the selected file and select Rename.
  • Type the new filename and then, press Enter

The procedure to create, rename, delete and save a file in Windows OS

To create a file:

  • Open the application using the Start button or through Icon or using the Run command.
  • Enter the content.
  • Save the file using Ctrl + S.

Renaming Files:
Using the FILE Menu

  • Select the File you wish to Rename.
  • Click File → Rename.
  • Type in the new name.
  • To finalize the renaming operation, press Enter.

To delete a file:
Select the file or folder you wish to delete.

  • Right-click the file or folder, select the Delete option from the pop-up menu, or Click
    File → Delete or press the Delete key from the keyboard.
  • The file will be deleted and moved to the Recycle bin.

To save a file:
Select the Save option from File Menu OR press Ctrl + S and then enter the file name and press OK.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

11th Computer Science Guide Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) Additional Questions and Answers

Part I & Part II

Part – I

Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
………………. is an Open source Operating System for desktop and server.
(a) Windows series
(b) Android
(c) iOS
(d) Linux
Answer:
(d) Linux

Question 2.
__________enables the hardware to communicate and operate with other software.
a) Loader
b) Compiler
c) Interpreter
d) Operating System
Answer:
d) Operating System

Question 3.
If you want to select multiple files or folders, use ……………….
(a) Ctrl + shift
(b) Ctrl + click
(c) shift + click
(d) Ctrl + shift + click
Answer:
(b) Ctrl + click

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 4.
__________controls the overall execution of the computer.
a) Loader
b) Compiler
c) Interpreter
d) Operating System
Answer:
d) Operating System

Question 5.
………………. is one of the popular Open Source versions of the UNIX Operating System.
(a) Windows 7
(b) Windows 8
(c) Linux
(d) Android
Answer:
(c) Linux

Question 6.
The most popular Operating System for desktop and laptop computers.
a) Windows Series
b) Android
c) iOS
d) Linux
Answer:
a) Windows Series

Question 7.
………………. icon is the equivalent of Recycle bin of windows OS. All the deleted Files and Folders are moved here.
(a) Trash
(b) Files
(c) Online shopping
(d) Libre Office Impress
Answer:
(a) Trash

Question 8.
The most popular Operating System for Apple phones, iPad, and iPods.
a) Windows Series
b) Android
c) iOS
d) Linux
Answer:
c) iOS

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 9.
………………. manages network connections, allowing you to connect to a wired or wireless network.
(a) Toolbar
(b) Title bar
(c) Session indicator
(d) Network indicator
Answer:
(d) Network indicator

Question 10.
Multiple applications can execute simultaneously in Windows, and this is known as __________
a) Multitasking
b) Multiuser
c) Parallel processing
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Multitasking

Question 11.
Clock is available in ……………….
(a) system tray
(b) Files
(c) start
(d) My documents
Answer:
(a) system tray

Question 12.
Windows Operating System uses __________as input device.
a) Keyboard
b) Mouse
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 13.
The menu bar is present below the ……………….
(a) Taskbar
(b) Scroll bar
(c) Title bar
(d) Function bar
Answer:
(c) Title bar

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 14.
__________ is used to enter alphabets, numerals and special characters.
a) Keyboard
b) Mouse
c) Scanner
d) Optical Character Reader
Answer:
a) Keyboard

Question 15.
………………. has the task for frequently used applications?
(a) Quick Launch Tool bar
(b) Settings
(c) My pc
(d) This pc
Answer:
(a) Quick Launch Toolbar

Question 16.
__________program is an application program.
a) Word processing
b) Games and Spreadsheets
c) Calculator
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 17.
SSD stands for ……………….
(a) Solid State Devices
(b) Simple Stage Driver
(c) Single State Drivers
(d) Synchronized State Devices
Answer:
(a) Solid State Devices

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 18.
__________is a file management activity.
a) Creating and Modifying file
b) Saving a file
c) Deleting a file
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 19.
What is the name given to the document window to enter or type the text?
(a) Workspace
(b) Work Area
(c) Typing Area
(d) Space
Answer:
(a) Workspace

Question 20.
Windows 1.x introduced in the year __________
a) 1992
b) 1987
c) 1985
d) 1982
Answer:
c) 1985

Question 21.
The disk drives mounted in the system can be seen by clicking ……………….
(a) Disk drive Icon
(b) Drive Icon
(c) Device Driver Icon
(d) My Computer Icon
Answer:
(d) My Computer Icon

Question 22.
Windows 3.x introduced in the year __________
a) 1992
b) 1987
c) 1985
d) 1982
Answer:
a) 1992

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 23.
Windows 10 was developed in the year ……………….
(a) 2009
(b) 2012
(c) 2015
(d) 2018
Answer:
(c) 2015

Question 24.
Windows 98 introduced in the year __________
a) 1992
b) 1988
c) 1998
d) 1995
Answer:
c) 1998

Question 25.
The Rulers are used to set ……………….
(a) Orientations
(b) Header
(c) Footer
(d) Margins
Answer:
(d) Margins

Question 26.
Windows-XP introduced in the year __________
a) 2002
b) 2000
c) 1990
d) 2001
Answer:
d) 2001

Question 27.
Which functional key is used to bring the focus on, the first menu of the menu bar?
(a) F5
(b) F10
(c) F11
(d) F7
Answer:
(b) F10

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 28.
Windows-7 introduced in the year __________
a) 2002
b) 2007
c) 2009
d) 2010
Answer:
c) 2009

Question 29.
Which one of the following is used to open the search results dialog box?
(a) search
(b) See more results
(c) search more results
(d) searching web
Answer:
(b) See more results

Question 30.
Windows-10 introduced in the year __________
a) 2012
b) 2015
c) 2009
d) 2010
Answer:
b) 2015

Question 31.
The keyboard shortcut to save a file is ……………….
(a) alt + s
(b) Ctrl + s
(c) Ctrl + alt + s
(d) winkey + s
Answer:
(b) Ctrl + s

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 32.
In which version Start button window introduced.
a) Windows-XP
c) Windows 2.x
b) Windows 3.x
d) Windows 95
Answer:
d) Windows 95

Question 33.
Applications or files or folders are opened using related shortcut icons by ……………….
(a) Click and drag
(b) double click
(c) click
(d) drag and drop
Answer:
(b) double click

Question 34.
In which Windows version plug and play was introduced.
a) Windows-XP
b) Windows 98
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows 95
Answer:
b) Windows 98

Question 35.
Which option is used to save the file?
(a) Ctrl + s
(b) Save
(c) File + save
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Question 36.
Which Windows version was designed to act as servers in the network.
a) Windows-XP
b) Windows 98
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
d) Windows-NT

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 37.
ubuntu supports an office suite called ……………….
(a) Open Office
(b) Star Office
(c) Libre Office
(d) MS – Office
Answer:
(c) Libre Office

Question 38.
__________versions of Windows 2000 were released.
a) 6
b) 5
c) 4
d) 3
Answer:
c) 4

Question 39.
Which one of the following is a server distribution of Linux?
(a) Deepin
(b) Firefox
(c) MS.word
(d) Files
Answer:
(a) Deepin

Question 40.
Which version of Windows 2000 released for both a Web server and an office server.
a) Professional
b) Data Centre Server
c) Advanced Server
d) Server
Answer:
d) Server

Question 41.
Which option is used to delete all files in the Recycle bin?
(a) Remove the Recycle bin
(b) Empty the Recycle bin
(c) Clear the Recycle bin
(d) Clean the Recycle bin
Answer:
(b) Empty the Recycle bin

Question 42.
Which version of Windows 2000 released for high-traffic computer networks.
a) Professional
b) Data Centre Server
c) Advanced Server
d) Server
Answer:
b) Data Centre Server

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 43.
Which version of Windows introduced as a stable version.
a) Windows-XP
b) Windows Me
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
a) Windows-XP

Question 44.
In which version of Windows booting time was improved.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows Me
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
a) Windows-7

Question 45.
__________feature is introduced in Windows-7.
a) Aero peek
b) Pinning programms to the taskbar
c) Handwriting recognition
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 46.
What is used to interact with windows by clicking icons?
(a) Mouse
(b) Keyboard
(c) Monitor
(d) Printer
Answer:
(a) Mouse

Question 47.
Which version of Windows served as a common platform for mobile and computer.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows – 8
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-NT
Answer:
b) Windows – 8

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 48.
Windows-8 takes better advantage of_________
a) multi-core processing
b) solid-state drives
c) touch screens
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 49.
The start button was added again in the version of Windows.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows-8
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-10
Answer:
d) Windows-10

Question 50.
Hardware settings are used in which option?
(a) Monitor
(b) Display
(c) Theme
(d) My Computer
Answer:
(b) Display

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux)

Question 51.
Cortana voice activated personal assistance introduced in _________version of Windows.
a) Windows-7
b) Windows-8
c) Windows-Vista
d) Windows-10
Answer:
d) Windows-10

Question 52.
The opening screen of Windows is called
a) taskbar
b) system tray
c) desktop
d) none of the above
Answer:
c) desktop

Question 53.
The notification area of ubuntu-desktop is otherwise called……………….
(a) Task bar
(b) Desktop
(c) status bar
(d) Indicator area
Answer:
(d) Indicator area

Question 54.
_________is a graphic symbol representing the window elements like files, folders, shortcuts etc.
a) Taskbar
b) Icon
c) Shortcut key
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Icon

Question 55.
_________play a vital role in GUI based applications.
a) Taskbar
b) Icon
c) Shortcut key
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Icon

Question 56.
The icons which are available on the desktop by default while installing Windows OS are called __________icons.
a) quick launch
b) standard
c) default
d) desktop
Answer:
b) standard

Question 57.
Which menu has the rename option?
(a) File
(b) Edit
(c) View
(d) Window
Answer:
(a) File

Question 58.
_________icons can be created for any application or file or folder.
a) Standard
b) Default
c) Shortcut
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Shortcut

Question 59.
By double-clicking the _________icon, the related application or file or folder will open.
a) Standard
b) Default
c) Shortcut
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Shortcut

Question 60.
The disk drive icons graphically represent _________disk drive options.
a) six
b) five
c) three
d) four
Answer:
b) five

Question 61.
Which option reboot the computer?
(a) Restart
(b) Boot
(c) Reboot
(d) Reselect
Answer:
(a) Restart

Question 62.
The disk drive icons available for __________
a) Removable storage
b) Network drive
c) Pen drive
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 63.
__________is a typical rectangular area in an application or a document.
a) Cell pointer
b) Window
c) Table cell
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Window

Question 64.
_________ is an area on the screen that displays information for a specific program.
a) Cell pointer
b) Window
c) Table cell
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Window

Question 65.
Who developed Ubuntu OS?
(a) Mark Shuttleworth
(b) Ricki Mascitti
(c) Dan Bricklin
(d) Bob Frankston
Answer:
(a) Mark Shuttleworth

Question 66.
Application window can be __________
a) resized
b) maximized or minimized
c) placed side by side or overlap
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 67.
When two or more windows are open, only one of them is active and the rest are__________
a) inactive
b) hidden
c) minimized
d) maximized
Answer:
a) inactive

Question 68.
A __________is a section of the screen used to display the contents of a document.
a) System Window
b) Application Box
c) Application Window
d) Document Window
Answer:
d) Document Window

Question 69.
How many sets of scroll bars are there?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(a) 2

Question 70.
__________ window is used for typing, editing, drawing, and formatting the text and graphics.
a) System Window
b) Application Box
c) Application Window
d) Document Window
Answer:
d) Document Window

Question 71.
__________window helps the user to communicate with the Application program.
a) System Window
b) Application Box
c) Application Window
d) Document Window
Answer:
c) Application Window

Question 72.
The title bar of a window will contain __________button.
a) minimize
b) maximize
c) close
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 73.
What is the name given to the larger window?
(a) Work window
(b) Document window
(c) Application window
(d) Desktop
Answer:
(c) Application window

Question 74.
__________in the menu bar can be accessed by pressing the Alt key and the letter that appears underlined in the menu title.
a) Menu
b) Title
c) Tool
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Menu

Question 75.
In Windows 7, in the absence of the menu bar, click __________and from the drop-down menu, click the Layout option and select the desired item from that list.
a) System Properties
b) Install
c) Uninstall
d) Organize
Answer:
d) Organize

Question 76.
The __________is the area in the document window to enter or type the text of your document.
a) application space
b) text space
c) content space
d) workspace
Answer:
d) workspace

Question 77.
The scroll bars are used to scroll the workspace __________
a) horizontally
b) vertically
c) either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) either A or B

Question 78.
Which option is used as a part of installing new software or windows update?
(a) Lock
(b) Restart
(c) Sleep
(d) Hibernate
Answer:
(b) Restart

Question 79.
Using the __________menu, we can start any application.
a) Start
b) File
c) Format
d) Tools
Answer:
a) Start

Question 80.
At the bottom of the screen is a horizontal bar called the __________
a) scrollbar
b) taskbar
c) quick launch toolbar
d) system tray
Answer:
b) taskbar

Question 81.
Task bar contains __________
a) Start button
b) shortcuts to various programs
c) minimized programs
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 82.
In the taskbar, the extreme right corner we can see the __________.
a) Start button
b) shortcuts to various programs
c) minimized programs
d) system tray
Answer:
d) system tray

Question 83.
System trays contains __________
a) volume control
b) network
c) date and time
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 84.
In the taskbar, __________contains task for frequently used applications.
a) scroll bar
b) start button
c) quick launch toolbar
d) system tray
Answer:
c) quick launch toolbar

Question 85.
By clicking the __________icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system in windows-XP and Windows Vista.
a) This PC
b) My Document
c) Computer
d) My Computer
Answer:
c) Computer

Question 86.
By clicking the __________icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system in Windows-8.
a) This PC
b) My Document
c) Computer
d) My Computer
Answer:
d) My Computer

Question 87.
The functionality of computer icon _________in all versions of Windows.
a) differs
b) remains the same
c) slightly change
d) None of these
Answer:
b) remains the same

Question 88.
By clicking the _________ icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system in Windows-7.
a) This PC
b) My Document
c) Computer
d) My Computer
Answer:
c) Computer

Question 89.
We can also open an application by clicking __________on the Start menu, and the name of the application.
a) Run
b) All Programs
c) Accessories
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Run

Question 90.
To quit an application, click the __________ button in the upper right corner of the application window.
a) Minimize
b) Maximize
c) Resize
d) Close
Answer:
d) Close

Question 91.
We can also quit an application by clicking on the option in Windows 7.
a) File → Exit
b) File → Close
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 92.
In Windows-7, we can organize your documents and programs in the form of_________
a) files
b) folder
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 93.
We can_________ the files and folders.
a) move and copy
b) rename and delete
c) search
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 94.
To better organise our files, we can store them in __________
a) shortcut
b) folder
c) recycle bin
d) None of these
Answer:
b) folder

Question 95.
There are __________ways in to create a new folder.
a) 5
b) 4
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
d) 2

Question 96.
__________is a command to create a new folder.
a) File → New → Directory
b) File → New → Folder
c) File → Open → Folder
d) File → New → New Folder
Answer:
b) File → New → Folder

Question 97.
The default name of the new folder is__________
a) New folder
b) Untitled
c) Noname
d) None of these
Answer:
a) New folder

Question 98.
To create a folder in the desktop __________command is used.
a) left-click →  New → Folder
b) right-click → New → Directory
c) double click → New → Folder
d) right-click → New → Folder
Answer:
d) right-click → New → Folder

Question 99.
_________ is an in-built word processor application in Windows OS.
a) Word
b) Wordstar
c) Wordpad
d) Notepad
Answer:
c) Wordpad

Question 100.
In Windows OS to create and manipulate text documents __________is used by default.
a) Word
b) Wordstar
c) Wordpad
d) Notepad
Answer:
c) Wordpad

Question 101.
__________is used to open Wordpad.
a) Click Start → All Programs → Accessories → Wordpad.
b) Run → type Wordpad, click OK
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 102.
In Wordpad, save the file using __________
a) File → Save
b) Ctrl + S
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 103.
In the Save As dialog box, select the location where you want to save the file by using the _______drop down list box.
a) filename
b) look in
c) file type
d) None of these
Answer:
b) look in

Question 104.
We can use the _______ box on the Start menu to quickly search a particular folder or file in the computer or in a specific drive.
a) Find
b) Search
c) Look in
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Search

Question 105.
The most common way of opening a file or a Folder is to _______on it.
a) right-click
b) double click
c) click and drag
d) move the mouse
Answer:
b) double click

Question 106.
How many methods are there to rename a file?
a) 4
b) 3
c) 2
d) only one
Answer:
b) 3

Question 107.
_______is the command for cut operation.
a) Edit → Cut
b) File → Cut
c) Format → Cut
d) Window → Cut
Answer:
a) Edit → Cut

Question 108.
_______is the shortcut for cut operation.
a) Ctrl + C
b) Ctrl + X
c) Ctrl + P
d) Ctrl + V
Answer:
b) Ctrl + X

Question 109.
_______is the command for copy operation.
a) Edit → Copy
b) File → Copy
c) Format → Copy
d) Window → Copy
Answer:
a) Edit → Copy

Question 110.
_______is the shortcut for copy operation.
a) Ctrl + C
b) Ctrl + X
c) Ctrl + P
d) Ctrl + V
Answer:
a) Ctrl + C

Question 111.
_______is the command for paste operation.
a) Edit → Paste
b) File → Paste
c) Format → Paste
d) Window → Paste
Answer:
a) Edit → Paste

Question 112.
_______is the shortcut for paste operation.
a) Ctrl + C
b) Ctrl + X
c) Ctrl + P
d) Ctrl + V
Answer:
d) Ctrl + V

Question 113.
_______is used for copy operation.
a) Click Edit Copy
b) Press Ctrl + C
c) Right click → Copy from the pop-up menu
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 114.
_______is used for cut operation.
a) Click Edit → Cut
b) Press Ctrl + X
c) Right click Cut from the pop-up menu
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 115.
_______is used for paste operation.
a) Click Edit → Paste
b) Press Ctrl + V
c) Right click → Paste from the pop-up menu
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 116.
There are _______methods of transferring files to or from a removable disk.
a) 2
b) 3
c) only one
d) None of these
Answer:
a) 2

Question 117.
_______is a method of transferring files to or from a removable disk.
a) Copy and Paste
b) Send To
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 118.
If you want to select multiple files or folders, use _______
a) Ctrl + Click
b) Shift + Click
c) Alt + Click
d) All the above
Answer:
a) Ctrl + Click

Question 119.
If you want to select consecutive files or folders, click on the first file and then use_______at the last file.
a) Ctrl + Click
b) Shift + Click
c) Alt + Click
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Shift + Click

Question 120.
When we delete a file or folder, it will move into the _______
a) My Document
b) My Computer
c) Recycle Bin
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Recycle Bin

Question 121.
To permanently delete a file or folder (i.e. to avoid sending a file or folder to the Recycle Bin), hold down the _______key, and press deletes on the keyboard.
a) ALT
b) SHIFT
c) CTRL
d) None of these
Answer:
b) SHIFT

Question 122.
_______is a special folder to keep the files or folders deleted by the user.
a) My Document
b) My Computer
c) Recycle Bin
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Recycle Bin

Question 123.
The user cannot access the files or folders available in the Recycle bin without _______it.
a) deleting
b) copy
c) restoring
d) None of these
Answer:
c) restoring

Question 124.
To delete all files in the Recycle bin, select _______option.
a) Empty the Recycle Bin
b) Clear the Recycle bin
c) Trash
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Empty the Recycle Bin

Question 125.
_______option is used to switch to another user account on the computer without closing our open programs and Windows processes.
a) log-off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
b) switch user

Question 126.
_________ option is used to switch to another user account on the computer after closing all your open programs and Windows processes.
a) log-off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
a) log-off

Question 127.
_______ option is used to reboot the computer.
a) log-off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
d) restart

Question 128.
_______option is often required as part of installing new software or Windows update.
a) log-off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
d) restart

Question 129.
_______option puts the computer into a low-power mode that retains all running programs and open Windows in computer memory for a super-quick restart.
a) log-off
b) switch user
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
c) sleep

Question 130.
_______option found only on laptop computers.
a) hibernate
b) shutdown
c) sleep
d) restart
Answer:
a) hibernate

Part II

Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
_______refers to a program or software in which the source code is available on the web to the general public free of cost.
a) malware
b) free source
c) open-source
d) None of these
Answer:
c) open-source

Question 2.
_______is typically created as a collaborative effort in which programmers continuously improve upon the source code on the web and share the changes within the community.
a) malware
b) free source code
c) open-source code
d) None of these
Answer:
c) open-source code

Question 3.
_______is one of the popular Open Source versions of the UNIX Operating System.
a) Linux
b) MSDOS
c) Oracle
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Question 4.
_______is open source as its source code is freely available.
a) Linux
b) MSDOS
c) Oracle
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Question 5.
The most popular Linux server distributor is_______
a) Ubuntu Linux
b) Linux Mint
c) Arch Linux
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 6.
The most popular Linux server distributor is_______
a) Deepin and Fedora
b) Debian
c) CentOS
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 7.
_______ is a Linux-based operating system.
a) Ubuntu
b) MSDOS
c) Oracle
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ubuntu

Question 8.
_______ is designed for computers, smartphones, and network servers.
a) Ubuntu
b) MSDOS
c) Oracle
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ubuntu

Question 9.
The Ubuntu system is developed by a UK based company called ._______
a) Microsoft
b) Borland International
c) Cambridge
d) Canonical Ltd
Answer:
d) Canonical Ltd

Question 10.
Ubuntu was conceived in the year _______
a) 1994
b) 2004
c) 2014
d) 2012
Answer:
b) 2004

Question 11.
Ubuntu was conceived by_______
a) Mark Shuttleworth
b) Mark Zuckerberg
c) Mark Shuttleberg
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Mark Shuttleworth

Question 12.
The desktop version of Ubuntu supports _______ software.
a) Firefox
b) Chrome
c) VLC
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 13.
Ubundu supports the office suite called_______
a) MS-Office
b) Star Office
c) Libre Office
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Libre Office

Question 14.
Ubuntu has in-built email software called_______
a) Firefox
b) Thunderfox
c) Firebird
d) Thunderbird
Answer:
d) Thunderbird

Question 15.
_______ gives the user access to email such as Exchange, Gmail, Hotmail, etc.
a) Firefox
b) Thunderfox
c) Firebird
d) Thunderbird
Answer:
d) Thunderbird

Question 16.
The best feature of Ubundu is _______
a) It is a free operating system
b) It is backed by a huge open source community
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 17.
_______ is based on the concept of a Graphical User Interface.
a) Ubundu
b) Microsoft Windows
c) Apple
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 18.
_______ is the icons in the Ubuntu OS.
a) Search your Computer
b) Files
c) Firefox Web browser
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 19.
_______ is a word processor software of Ubundu.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
a) LibreOffice Writer

Question 20.
_______ is a spreadsheet software of Ubundu.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
b) LibreOfficeCalc

Question 21.
_______ is a Presentation software of Ubundu.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
c) LibreOffice Impress

Question 22.
_______ is the online shopping icon of Ubundu.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox
c) Bigshop
d) Wallmart
Answer:
a) Amazon

Question 23.
_______ is a Recycle Bin Icon of Ubundu.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox
c) Files
d) Trash
Answer:
d) Trash

Question 24.
In Unundu, the frequently used icons in the menu bar are found on the _______
a) left
b) middle
c) right
d) Either A or B or C
Answer:
c) right

Question 25.
The most common indicators in the Menu bar are located in the _______ .
a) Indicator
b) Notification area
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 26.
_______ manages network connections, allowing you to connect to a wired or wireless network.
a) Indicator
b) Notification area
c) Either A or B
d) Network Indicator
Answer:
d) Network Indicator

Question 27.
_______ shows the current keyboard layout.
a) Indicator
b) Notification area
c) Text Entry Settings
d) Network Indicator
Answer:
c) Text Entry Settings

Question 28.
The keyboard indicator menu contains the_______ menu items.
a) Character Map
b) Keyboard Layout Chart
c) Text Entry Settings
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 29.
_______ indicator incorporates your social applications.
a) Messaging
b) Sound
c) Session
d) Network
Answer:
a) Messaging

Question 30.
From Messaging indicator, we can access _______
a) instant messenger
b) email clients
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 31.
_______ indicator provides an easy way to adjust the volume as well as access your music player.
a) Messaging
b) Sound
c) Session
d) Network
Answer:
b) Sound

Question 32.
_______ indicator is a link to the system settings, Ubuntu Help, and session options
a) Messaging
b) Sound
c) Session
d) Network
Answer:
c) Session

Question 33.
_______ displays the current time and provides a link to your calendar and time and date settings.
a) Indicator
b) Clock
c) System Tray
d) Notification Area
Answer:
b) Clock

Question 34.
_______ is a session option.
a) locking your computer and user/guest session
b) logging out of a session
c) restarting the computer or shutting down completely
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 35.
The _______ shows the name of the currently selected directory.
a) Title bar
b) System Tray
c) Notification Area
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Title bar

Question 36.
The toolbar displays _______
a) your directory browsing history
b) your location in the file system
c) a search button and options for your current directory view
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 37.
The default Ubuntu 16.04 theme known as_______
a) Ambiance
b) Aspirant
c) Environment
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Ambiance

Question 38.
The Launcher is equivalent to _______
a) System Tray
b) Taskbar
c) Desktop
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Taskbar

Question 39.
The vertical bar of icons on the left side of the desktop is called _______
a) System Tray
b) Taskbar
c) Launcher
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Launcher

Question 40.
The Launcher provides easy access to _______
a) applications
b) mounted devices
c) Trash
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 41.
All current applications on your system will place an icon in the _______
a) System Tray
b) Taskbar
c) Launcher
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Launcher

Question 42.
_______ icon is equal to the search button in Windows OS.
a) Search Your Computer
b) Find
c) Quick Search
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Search Your Computer

Question 43.
_______ icon is equivalent to My Computer icon.
a) Your Computer
b) Files
c) Quick Search
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Files

Question 44.
We can directly go to Desktop, Documents using_______ icon.
a) Your Computer
b) Files
c) Quick Search
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Files

Question 45.
By clicking the _______ icon, we can directly browse the internet.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox Web Browser
c) Bishop
d) Walmart
Answer:
b) Firefox Web Browser

Question 46.
_______ is equivalent to clicking the Web Browser in Taskbar in Windows.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox Web Browser
c) Bigshop
d) Walmart
Answer:
b) Firefox Web Browser

Question 47.
_______ icon will directly take you to document preparation applications like MS Word in Windows.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
a) LibreOffice Writer

Question 48.
_______ icon will open LibreOffice Calc application.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) Libre Office Caic
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Libre Office Caic

Question 49.
_______ is similar to MS Excel in Windows.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) Libre Office Caic
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Libre Office Caic

Question 50.
_______ icon is used to prepare any presentations in Ubuntu like MS PowerPoint.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCaic
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) None of these
Answer:
c) LibreOffice Impress

Question 51.
_______ icon will let you add any additional applications you want.
a) LibreOffice Writer
b) LibreOfficeCalc
c) LibreOffice Impress
d) Ubundu Software
Answer:
d) Ubundu Software

Question 52.
Using _______ icon users can buy and sell any products online.
a) Amazon
b) Firefox Web Browser
c) Online Shopping
d) Wallnnart
Answer:
c) Online Shopping

Question 53.
_______ icon is similar to the Control panel in the Windows Operating System.
a) System Settings
b) Your Computer
c) Launcher
d) None of these
Answer:
a) System Settings

Question 54.
Match the following:
table
a) Trash 1. Online Shopping App
b) System Settings 2. Recycle Bin
c) LibreOffice Impress 3. Control Panel
d) Amazon 4. Presentation software
a) 2, 1, 4, 3
b) 4, 3, 1, 2
c) 3, 1, 4, 2
d) 2, 3, 4, 1
Answer:
d) 2, 3, 4, 1

Question 55.
Identify the correct statement from the following:
a) In Ubundu, all the deleted Files and Folders are moved to Trash
b) Similar to Windows OS, we can create, delete the files and folders with the same procedure by clicking the Files icon in Ubundu.
c) A new File or new Folder can also be created by using File menu in Ubundu
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 56.
Shutting down Ubuntu using Session _______ option.
a) Log out
b) Suspend
c) Shutdown
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Part – I

Shot Answers

Question 1.
Name some distributions of Linux.
Answer:

  1. Fedora
  2. Ubuntu
  3. BOSS
  4. RedHat
  5. Linux Mint.

Question 2.
What are the most popular operating systems suitable for desktop and laptop computers?
Answer:
All the Windows Series like Windows Vista, Windows-7, etc operating systems are suitable for desktop and laptop computers.

Question 3.
What is Open source Operating system?
Answer:
It is the software in which the source code is available to the general public for use and modification from its original design, free of charge.

Question 4.
Which operating system suitable for Apple phones, iPad, and iPods?
Answer:
iOS operating systems are suitable for Apple phones, iPad, and iPod.

Question 5.
What are the similarities between Ubuntu and other operating systems?
Answer:
All are based on the concepts of Graphical User Interface.

Question 6.
What is multitasking?
Answer:
Multiple applications can execute simultaneously in Windows, and this is known as multitasking.

Question 7.
What is a workspace of a window?
Answer:
The workspace is the area in the document window to enter or type the text of your document. The workspace is the element of a window.

Question 8.
What are the file management activities?
Answer:
File management activities are creating, modifying, saving, deleting files and folders.

Question 9.
What are the four versions of Windows 2000 and its application?
Answer:
The four versions of Windows 2000 are:

  • Windows 2000 – Professional – for business desktop and laptop systems.
  • Windows 2000 – Server – for both a Web server and an office server.
  • Windows 2000 – Advanced Server – for line-of-business applications.
  • Windows 2000 – Data Centre Server – for high-traffic computer networks.

Question 10.
What is Firefox?
Answer:
It is a browser.

Question 11.
What is a desktop?
Answer:
The opening screen of Windows is called Desktop.

Question 12.
Write a note on Icons.
Answer:
Icon is a graphic symbol representing the window elements like files, folders, shortcuts etc. Icons play a vital role in GUI based applications.

Question 13.
What do you mean by standard icon? Give an example.
Answer:
The icons which are available on desktop by default while installing Windows OS are called standard icons. The standard icons available in all Windows OS are My Computer, Documents and Recycle Bin.

Question 14.
How will you switch to desktop?
Answer:
We can move to the Desktop any time by pressing the Winkey + D or using Aero Peek while working in any application.

Question 15.
Define Window.
Answer:
Window is a typical rectangular area in an application or a document. It is an area on the screen that displays information for a specific program.

Question 16.
Write note on document window.
Answer:
A document window is a section of the screen used to display the contents of a document.

Question 17.
Write a note on Recycle Bin.
Answer:
Recycle Bin: Recycle bin is a special folder to keep the files or folders deleted by the user, which means you still have an opportunity to recover them. The user cannot access the files or folders available in the Recycle bin without restoring it.

Question 18.
How will you restore file or folder from Recycle Bin?
Answer:
To restore file or folder from the Recycle Bin

  • Open Recycle bin.
  • Right-click on a file or folder to be restored and select the Restore option from the pop-up menu.
  • To restore multiple files or folders, select Restore all items.
  • To delete all files in the Recycle bin, select Empty the Recycle Bin.

Question 19.
How will you create a desktop shortcut?
Answer:
Creating Shortcuts on the Desktop:
Shortcuts to your most often used folders and files may be created and placed on the Desktop to help automate your work.

  • Select the file or folder that you wish to have as a shortcut on the Desktop.
  • Right-click on the file or folder.
  • Select Send to from the shortcut menu, then select Desktop (Create Shortcut) from the sub¬menu.
  • A shortcut for the file or folder will now appear on your desktop and you can open it from the desktop in the same way as any other icon.

Question 20.
How will you log off/shut down the computer?
Answer:
To Log off/Shut down the computer :

  • Click start to → log off (click the arrow next to Shut down) or Start Shutdown.
  • If you have any open programs, then you will be asked to close them or windows will Force shut down, you will lose any unsaved information if you do this.

Question 21.
Compare switch user and log off options.
Answer:

  • Switch User: Switch to another user account on the computer without closing your open programs and Windows processes.
  • Log Off: Switch to another user account on the computer after closing all your open programs and Windows processes.

Question 22.
When we use the Lock and Restart option?
Answer:

  • Lock: Lock the computer while you’re away from it.
  • Restart: Reboot the computer. This option is often required as part of installing new software or Windows update.

Question 23.
Write a note on the Sleep mode option.
Answer:
Sleep: Puts the computer into a low-power mode that retains all running programs and open Windows in computer memory for a super-quick restart.

Question 24.
Write a note on Hibernate mode option? Where it is available?
Answer:
The Hibernate option is found only on laptop computers. It puts the computer into a low-power mode after saving all running programs and open windows on the machine’s hard drive for a quick restart.

Part – II

Short Answers

Question 1.
How will you rename the files or folders?
Answer:
Using the FILE Menu

  1. Select the File or Folder you wish to Rename.
  2. Click File → Rename.
  3. Type in the new name.
  4. To finalize the renaming operation, press Enter

Question 2.
What are the merits of open source code?
Answer:
Open Source code is typically created as a collaborative effort in which programmers continuously improve upon the source code on the web and share the changes within the community.

Question 3.
List out the important functions of an OS?
Answer:
Following are some of the important functions of an Operating System:

  1. Memory Management
  2. Process Management
  3. Device Management
  4. File Management
  5. Security Management
  6. Control overall system performance
  7. Error detecting aids
  8. Coordination between other software and users

Question 4.
List the distributors of Linux.
Answer:
The most popular Linux server distributors are: Ubuntu Linux

  • Linux Mint
  • Arch Linux
  • Deepin
  • Fedora
  • Debian
  • CentOS

Question 5.
Write about Ubuntu.
Answer:
Ubuntu is a Linux-based operating system. It is designed for computers, smartphones, and network servers. The system is developed by a UK-based company called Canonical Ltd. Ubuntu was conceived in 2004 by Mark Shuttleworth, a successful South African entrepreneur.

Question 6.
Write note on the Network indicator.
Answer:
Network indicator – This manages network connections, allowing you to connect to a wired or wireless network.

Question 7.
What are the four versions of Windows 2000?
Answer:

  1. Professional – business desktop and laptop systems.
  2. Server – used as both a web server and an office server.
  3. Advanced server – for a line of business applications.
  4. Datacenter server – for high-traffic computer networks.

Question 8.
Write note on the Sound indicator.
Answer:
Sound indicator – This provides an easy way to adjust the volume as well as access your music player.

Question 9.
What is a Window?
Answer:
Window is a typical rectangular area in an application or a document. It is an area on the screen that displays information for a specific program. The two types of windows are the application window and the document window.

Question 10.
Write about session indicators.
Answer:
Session indicator – This is a link to the system settings, Ubuntu Help, and session options like locking your computer, user/guest session, logging out of a session, restarting the computer, or shutting down completely.

Question 11.
How will you start an application?
Answer:

  1. Click the start button and then point to all programs. The program menu appears. Point to the group that contains the application you want to start and then click the application name.
  2. Click Run on the start menu and type the name of the application and click ok.

Question 12.
Write about Toolbar of Ubuntu.
Answer:
Toolbar – The toolbar displays your directory browsing history, your location in the file system, a search button, and options for your current directory view.

Question 13.
Write a note on Recycle bin.
Answer:
Recycle bin is a special folder to keep the files or folders deleted by the user. From the recycle bin, files can be restored back.

Part – I

Explain brief

Question 1.
Discuss the following Icons.
Answer:
Shortcut Icons:
Shortcut icons can be created for any application or file or folder. By double-clicking the icon, the related application or file, or folder will open. This represents the shortcut to open a particular application.

Disk drive icons:
The disk drive icons graphically represent five disk drive options.

  1. Hard disk.
  2. CD – ROM/DVD Drive.
  3. Pen drive.
  4. Other removable storage such as mobile, smartphone, tablet, etc.
  5. Network drives if your system is connected with another system.

Question 2.
What is a shortcut icon? Mention its types.
Answer:
Shortcut icons can be created for any application or file or folder. By double-clicking the icon, the related application or file, or folder will open.
Type of shortcuts:

  1. Desktop shortcut
  2. Keyboard shortcut

Question 3.
Write notes on disk drive icons.
Answer:
The disk drive icons graphically represent five disk drive options.

  1. Hard disk.
  2. CD-ROM/DVD Drive
  3. Pen drive
  4. Other removable storage such as mobile, smartphone, tablet, etc.
  5. Network drives if your system is connected with another system.

Question 4.
What is the application window? Explain with an example.
Answer:
It is an area on a computer screen with defined boundaries, and within which information is displayed.
Such windows can be resized, maximized, minimized, placed side by side, overlap, and so on.
An Application Window contains an open application i.e. current application such as Word or Paint. When two or more windows are open, only one of them is active and the rest are inactive.

Question 5.
Explain various methods of creating Files and Folders.
Answer:
Creating files and Folders:
Creating Folders:
You can store your files in many locations – on the hard disk or in other devices. To better organise your files, you can store them in folders.
There are two ways in which you can create a new folder:

Method I:
Step 1: Open Computer Icon.
Step 2: Open any drive where you want to create a new folder. (For example select D:)
Step 3: Click on File → New → Folder.
Step 4: A new folder is created with the default name “New folder”.
Step 5: Type in the folder name and press Enter key.

Method II:
In order to create a folder in the desktop:
Step 1: In the Desktop, right-click → New → Folder.
Step 2: A Folder appears with the default name “New folder” and it will be highlighted.
Step 3: Type the name you want and press Enter Key.
Step 4: The name of the folder will change.

Question 6.
Write about Taskbar.
Answer:
At the bottom of the screen there- is a horizontal bar called the taskbar. This bar contains the Start button(left side), shortcuts to various programs, minimized programs, and in the extreme right corner you can see the system tray which consists of volume control, network, date and time, etc. Next to the Start button is the quick Launch Toolbar which contains tasks for frequently used applications.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 16

Question 7.
Explain Computer Icon.
Answer:
Computer Icon – By clicking this icon, the user can see the disk drivers mounted in the system. In Windows XP, Vista, this icon is called “My computer” in Windows 8 and 10, it is called “This PC”.
The functionality of the computer icon remains the same in all versions of windows as shown in the following Figure.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 17

Question 8.
How will you copy files and folders?
Answer:
Copying Files and Folders:
There are variety of ways to copy files and folders:

The method I – COPY and PASTE:
To copy a file or folder, first, select the file or folder and then choose one of the following:

  1. Click Edit → Copy or Ctrl + C or right-click → Copy from the pop-up menu.
  2. To paste the file(s) or folder(s) in the new location, navigate to the target location then do one of the following:
  3. Click Edit → Paste or Ctrl + V.
  4. Or Right-click → Paste from the pop-up menu.

Method II – Drag and Drop:

  1. In the RIGHT pane, select the file or folder you want to copy.
  2. Click and drag the selected file and/or folder to the folder list on the left, and drop it where you want to copy the file and/or folder.
  3. Your file(s) and folder(s) will now appear in the new area.

Question 9.
How will you search files or folders using the Computer icon?
Answer:
Procedure:

  • Click Computer Icon from desktop or from the Start menu.
  • The Computer disk drive screen will appear and at the top right corner of that screen, there is a search box option.
  • Type the name of the file or the folder you want to search. Even if you give the part of the file or folder name, it will display the list of files or folders starting with the specified name.
  • Just click and open that file or the folder.

Question 10.
How will you delete a file or folder?
Answer:
To delete a file or folder: Select the file or folder you wish to delete.

  • Right-click the file or folder, select the Delete option from the pop-up menu or Click File → Delete or press the Delete key from the keyboard.
  • The file will be deleted and moved to the Recycle bin.

Question 11.
Represent overview of an operating system using a diagram.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 18

Part II

Explain brief

Question 1.
What are the features of Ubuntu?
Answer:
Features of Ubuntu

  • The desktop version of Ubuntu supports all norma! software like Windows such as Firefox, Chrome, VLC, etc.
  • It supports the office suite called LibreOffice.
  • Ubuntu has in-built email software called Thunderbird, which gives the user access to email such as Exchange, Gmail, Hotmail, etc.
  • There are free applications for users to view and edit photos, to manage and share videos.
  • It is easy to find content on Ubuntu with the smart searching facility.
  • The best feature is, it is a free operating system and is backed by a huge open source community.

Question 2.
What are the names of the icons in the Ubuntu OS?
Answer:

  • Search your Computer
  • Files
  • Firefox Webbrowser
  • LibreOffice Writer
  • LibreOfficeCalc
  • LibreOffice Impress
  • Ubuntu Software
  • Amazon
  • System Settings
  • Trash

Question 3.
Explain about Ubuntu menu bar.
Answer:
Menu bar – The menu bar is located at the top of the screen, The menu bar Incorporates common functions used in Ubuntu. The frequently used icons in the menu bar are found on the right. The most common indicators in the Menu bar are located in the indicator or notification area.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 19

Question 4.
Write a note on Text entry settings.
Answer:
Text entry settings: This shows the current keyboard layout (such as En, Fr, Ku, and so on. If more than one keyboard layout is shown, it allows you to select a keyboard layout out of those choices. The keyboard indicator menu contains the following menu items: Character Map, Keyboard Layout Chart, and Text Entry Settings.

Question 5.
Write about Ubundu desktop background.
Answer:
The desktop background Below the menu bar at the top of the screen is an image covering the entire desktop. This is the default desktop background or wallpaper;, belonging to the default Ubuntu 16.04 theme known as Ambiance.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 20

Question 6.
Explain Ubuntu Shutting down method.
Answer:
Shutting down Ubuntu using Session options
When you have finished working on your computer, you can choose to Log Out, Suspend or Shut down through the Session Indicator on the far right side of the top panel.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 21

Part – I

Explain brief

Question 1.
Explain the various mouse actions.
Answer:
The following are the mouse actions:

ActionReaction
Point to an itemMove the mouse pointer over the item.
ClickPoint to the item on the screen, press and release the left mouse button.
Right-clickPoint to the item on the screen, press and release the right mouse button. Clicking the right mouse button displays a pop-up menu with various options.
Double-clickPoint to the item on the screen, quickly press twice the left mouse button.
Drag and dropPoint to an item then hold the left mouse button as you move the pointer press and you have reached the desired position, release the mouse button.

Question 2.
Draw and explain the Elements of a window.
Answer:
The elements of a window
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 22

Menu Bar:
The menu bar is seen under the title bar. Menus in the menu bar can be accessed by pressing the Alt key and the letter that appears underlined in the menu title. Additionally, pressing Alt or F10 brings the focus on the first menu of the menu bar.

The Workspace:
The workspace is the area in the document window to enter or type the text of your document.

Scroll bars:
The scroll bars are used to scroll the workspace horizontally or vertically.

Corners and borders:
The corners and borders of the window help to drag and resize the windows. The mouse pointer changes to a double-headed arrow when positioned over a border or a corner. Drag the border or corner in the direction indicated by the double-headed arrow to the desired size. The window can be resized by dragging the corners diagonally across the screen.

Title bar:
The first line of the window is called the title bar. It contains the name of the application on its left and the sizing buttons on its right.

Question 3.
How will you create a folder? Explain its methods with an example.
Answer:
There are two ways in which you can create a new folder:

Method I:
Step 1: Open Computer Icon.
Step 2: Open any drive where you want to create a new folder. (For example select D:.
Step 3: Click on File → New Folder.
Step 4: A new folder is created with the default name “New folder”.
Step 5: Type in the folder name and press Enter key.

Method II:
In order to create a folder on the desktop:
Step 1: In the Desktop, right-click New → Folder.
Step 2: A Folder appears with the default name “New folder” and it will be highlighted.
Step 3: Type the name you want and press Enter Key.
Step 4: The name of the folder will change.

Question 4.
How will you create a file in Wordpad?
Answer:
To create files in Wordpad we need to follow the steps given below.

  1. Click Start → All Programs → Accessories → Wordpad or Run → type Wordpad, click OK. Wordpad window will be opened.
  2. Type the contents in the workspace and save the file using File → Save or Ctrl + S.
  3. Save As dialog box will be opened.
  4. In the dialog box, select the location where you want to save the file by using the Look in the drop-down list box.
  5. Type the name of the file in the file name text box.
  6. Click the save button.

Question 5.
Explain the method of finding Files and Folders.
Answer:
You can use the search box on the Start menu to quickly search a particular folder or file in the computer or in a specific drive.

To find a file or folder

  1. Click the Start button, the search box appears at the bottom of the start menu.
  2. Type the name of the file or the folder you want to search. Even if you give the part of the file or folder name, it will display the list of files or folders starting with the specified name.
  3. The files or the folders with the specified names will appear, if you click that file, it will directly open that file or the folder.
  4. There is another option called “See more results” which appears above the search box.
  5. If you click it, it will lead you to a Search Results dialog box where you can click and open that file or the folder.

Question 6.
Explain the various methods to Rename a file.
Answer:
You can rename using the File menu, left mouse button, or right mouse button.

Method 1:
Using the FILE Menu

  1. Select the File or Folder you wish to Rename.
  2. Click File → Rename.
  3. Type in the new name.
  4. To finalise the renaming operation, press Enter.

Method 2:
Using the Right Mouse Button

  1. Select the file or folder you wish to rename.
  2. Click the right mouse button over the file or folder.
  3. Select Rename from the pop-up menu.
  4. Type in the new name.
  5. To finalise the renaming operation, press Enter.

Method 3:
Using the Left Mouse Button

  1. Select the file or folder you wish to rename.
  2. Press F2 or click over the file or folder. A surrounding rectangle will appear around the name.
  3. Type in the new name.
  4. To finalise the renaming operation, press Enter.

Question 7.
How will you move the files and folders? Explain various methods.
Answer:
Method I:
CUT and PASTE: To move a file or folder, first select the file or folder and then choose one of the following:

  1. Click on the Edit → Cut or Ctrl + X Or right-click → cut from the pop-up menu.
  2. To move the file(s) or folder(s) in the new location, navigate to the new location and paste it using Click Edit → Paste from the edit menu or Ctrl + V using the keyboard.
  3. Or Right-click →  Paste from the pop-up menu. The file will be pasted in the new location.

Method II:
Drag and Drop: In the disk drive window, we have two panes called left and right panes. In the left pane, the files or folders are displayed like a tree structure. In the right pane, the files inside the specific folders in the left pane are displayed with various options.

  1. In the right pane of the Disk drive window, select the file or folder we want to move.
  2. Click and drag the selected file or folder from the right pane to the folder list on the left pane.
  3. Release the mouse button when the target folder is highlighted (active).
  4. Our file or folder will now appear in the new area.

Question 8.
How will you copy the files and folders? Explain various methods.
Answer:
Copying Files and Folders Method I – COPY and PASTE
To copy a file or folder, first, select the file or folder and then choose one of the following:

  1. Click Edit Copy or Ctrl + C or right-click Copy from the pop-up menu.
  2. To paste the file(s) or folder(s) in the new location, navigate to the target location then do one of the following:
  3. Click Edit Paste or Ctrl + V.
  4. Or Right-click → Paste from the pop-up menu.

Method II – Drag and Drop

  1. In the RIGHT pane, select the file or folder we want to copy.
  2. Click and drag the selected file and/or folder to the folder list on the left, and drop it where you want to copy the file and/or folder.
  3. Our file(s) and folder(s) will now appear in the new area.

Question 9.
How will you copy the files and folders to a removable disk? Explain various methods.
Answer:
Copying Files and Folders to a removable disk
The following are methods of transferring files to or from a removable disk:

  • Copy and Paste
  • Send To

METHOD I: Copy and Paste

  1. Plug the USB flash drive directly into an available USB port.
  2. If the USB flash drive or external drive folder does NOT open automatically, follow these steps:
  3. Click Start → Computer.
  4. Double-click on the Removable Disk associated with the USB flash drive.
  5. Navigate to the folders in your computer containing files you want to transfer.
  6. Right-click on the file you want to copy, then select Copy.
  7. Return to the Removable Disk window, right-click within the window, then select Paste.

METHOD II: Send To

  1. Plug the USB flash drive directly into an available USB port.
  2. Navigate to the folders in our computer containing files you want to transfer.
  3. Right-click on the file we want to transfer to your removable disk.
  4. Click Send To and select the Removable Disk associated with the USB flash drive.

Part – II

Explain detail

Question 1.
Explain the elements of Ubuntu,
Answer:
Search your Computer Icon
This icon is equal to the search button in Windows OS. Here, you have to give the name of the File or Folder for searching them.

Files :
This icon is equivalent to the My Computer icon. From here, you can directly go to Desktop, Documents, and so on.

Firefox Web Browser:
By clicking this icon, you can directly browse the internet. This is equivalent to clicking the Web Browser in Taskbar in Windows.

Online Shopping icon:
Using this icon users can buy and sell any products online.

System Settings Icons :
This icon is similar to the Control panel in the Windows Operating System. But here, you need to authenticate the changes by giving your password. You cannot simply change as you do in Windows.

Trash :
This icon is the equivalent of Recycle bin of windows OS. All the deleted Flies and Folders are
moved here.

Question 2.
Explain the method of creating, deleting files/folders in Ubuntu.
Answer:
Creating, Deleting Files/Folders
Similar to Windows OS, you can create, delete the files and folders with the same procedure by clicking the Files icon. The following Figure shows the method of creating a File or Folder by right-clicking on the Desktop.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 23

A new File or new Folder can also be created by using the File menu.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 24
Deleting a File/Folder: A file/folder created by you can be moved to trash by using right-click or by using the menu.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 25

Question 3.
Explain LibreOffice Writer, LibreOffice Cacl and LibreOffice Impress.
Answer:
LibreOffice Writer
This icon will directly take you to document preparation applications like MS Word in Windows.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 26

Libre Office Cac: This icon will open the LibreOffice Calc application. It is similar to MS Excel in Windows.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 27

LibreOffice Impress: By clicking this icon, you can open LibreOffice Impress to prepare any presentations in Ubuntu like MS PowerPoint.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 5 Working with Typical Operating System (Windows & Linux) 28

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

11th Computer Science Guide Theoretical Concepts of Operating System Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the correct answer.

Question 1.
Operating system is a
a) Application Software
b) Hardware
c) System Software
d) Component
Answer:
c) System Software

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 2.
Identify the usage of Operating Systems
a) Easy interaction between the human and computer
b) Controlling input & output Devices
c) Managing use of main memory
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 3.
Which of the following is not a function of an Operating System?
a) Process Management
b) Memory Management
c) Security management
d) Complier Environment
Answer:
d) Complier Environment

Question 4.
Which of the following OS is a Commercially licensed Operating system?
a) Windows
b) UBUNTU
C) FEDORA
d) REDHAT
Answer:
a) Windows

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 5.
Which of the following Operating systems support Mobile Devices?
a) Windows 7
b) Linux
c) BOSS
d) iOS
Answer:
a) Windows 7

Question 6.
File Management manages
a) Files
b) Folders
c) Directory systems
d) All the Above
Answer:
d) All the Above

Question 7.
Interactive Operating System provides
a) Graphics User Interface (GUI)
b) Data Distribution
c) Security Management
d) Real Time Processing
Answer:
a) Graphics User Interface (GUI)

Question 8.
Android is a
a) Mobile Operating system
b) Open Source
c) Developed by Google
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 9.
Which of the following refers to Android operating system’s version?
a) JELLYBEAN
b) UBUNTU
c) OS/2
d) MITTIKA
Answer:
a) JELLYBEAN

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What are the advantages of management in Operating System?
Answer:

  1. Allocating memory is easy and cheap
  2. Any free page is ok, OS can take the first one out of the list it keeps
  3. Eliminates external fragmentation
  4. Data (page frames) can be scattered all over PM
  5. Pages are mapped appropriately anyway
  6. Allows demand paging and pre – paging
  7. More efficient swapping
  8. No need for considerations about fragmentation
  9. Just swap out the page least likely to be used

Question 2.
What is the multi-user Operating system?
Answer:
It is used in computers and laptops that allow same data and applications to be accessed by multiple users at the same time.
The users can also communicate with each other. Windows, Linux and UNIX are examples for multi-user Operating System.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
What is a GUI?
Answer:
GUI – Graphical User Interface – It allows the use of icons or other visual indicators to interact with electronic devices, rather than using only text via the command line. For example, all versions of Microsoft Windows utilize a GUI, whereas MS-DOS does not.

Question 4.
List out different distributions of Linux operating system.
Answer:
Linux distributors are Ubuntu, Mint, Fedora, RedHat, Debian, Google’s Android, Chrome OS, and Chromium OS.

Question 5.
What are the security management features available in Operating System?
Answer:
Security Management features:

  1. File access level security
  2. System-level security
  3. Network-level security

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 6.
What is multi-processing?
Answer:
This is a one of the features of Operating System. It has two or more processors for a single running process .

Question 7.
What are the different Operating Systems used in computer?
Answer:
Different operating system used:

  1. Single user, single Task Operating system
  2. Multi-user operating system
  3. Multiprocessing operating system
  4. Distributed Operating system

Part III

Explain in Brief

Question 1.
What are the advantages and disadvantages of Time-sharing features?
Answer:

AdvantagesDisadvantages
Many applications can run at the same time.it consumes much resources.
The CPU is not idle.Constraint on security and integrity of data.
Provides the advantage of quick response.Reliability constraint exists.

Question 2.
Explain and List examples of mobile operating system.
Answer:
A Mobile Operating System (or mobile OS) is an operating system that is specifically designed to run on mobile devices such as phones, tablets, smartwatches, etc.
Example: Apple IOS

Google Android: Android is a mobile OS developed by Google, based on Linux and designed for smartphones and tabs. iOS was developed by Apple.
Example: Android, ColorOS, LGUX, MIUI.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
What are the differences between Windows and Linux Operating systems?
Answer:

WINDOWSLINUX
It is a licensed OSLinux is an open-source operating system
Vulnerable to viruses and malware attacksMore secure
Windows must boot from the primary- partitionIt can be booted from an either primary or logical partition
Windows file name are not case sensitiveIn Linux, file names are case sensitive
Windows uses the microkernel which takes less spaceLinux uses the monolithic kernel which consumes more running space

Question 4.
Explain the process management algorithms in Operating System.
Answer:
The following algorithms are mainly used to allocate the job (process) to the processor: FIFO, SJF, Round Robin, based on priority.

  1. First In First Out (FIFO) Scheduling – This algorithm is based on queuing technique. Technically, the process that enters the queue first is executed first by the CPU, followed by the next, and so on. The processes are executed in the order of the queue.
  2. Shortest Job First (SJF) Scheduling – This algorithm works based on the size of the job being executed by the CPU.
  3. Round Robin Scheduling – Round Robin (RR) Scheduling algorithm is designed especially -for time-sharing systems, jobs are assigned, and processor time in a circular method.
  4. Based on priority – The given job (process) is assigned on a priority. The job which has higher priority is more important than ether jobs.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Part IV

Explain in detail

Question 1.
Explain the concept of a Distributed Operating System.
Answer:
The data and application that are stored and processed on multiple physical locations across the world over the digital network (internet/intranet). The Distributed Operating System is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world. The user can handle the data from different locations. The users can access it as if it is available on their own computer.

The advantages of distributed Operating System are as follows:

  • A user at one location can make use of all the resources available at another location over the network.
  • Many computer resources can be added easily in the network
  • Improves the interaction with the customers and clients.
  • Reduces the load on the host computer.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 2.
Explain the main purpose of an operating system.
Answer:
The main use of the Operating System is:

  • To ensure that a computer can be used to extract what the user wants it to do.
  • Easy interaction between the users and computers.
  • Starting computer operation automatically when power is turned on (Booting).
  • Controlling Input and Output Devices.
  • Manage the utilization of main memory.
  • Providing security to user programs.

Question 3.
Explain the advantages and disadvantages of open-source operating systems.
Answer:
The benefits of open source are tremendous and have gained huge popularity in the IT field in recent years. They are as follows:

  1. Open-source (OS) is free to use, distribute and modify.
  2. Open source is independent of the company as an author who originally created it.
  3. It is accessible to everyone. Anyone can debug the coding.
  4. It doesn’t have the problem of incompatible formats that exist in proprietary software.
  5. It is easy to customize as per our needs.
  6. Excellent support will be provided by programmers who will assist in making solutions.

Some of the disadvantages are:

  1. The latest hardware is incompatible, i.e. lack of device drivers.
  2. It is less user-friendly and not as easy to use.
  3. There may be some indirect costs involved such as paying for external support.
  4. Malicious users can potentially view it and exploit any vulnerability.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

11th Computer Science Guide Theoretical Concepts of Operating System Additional Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose the correct answer

Question 1.
Software is classified into ………………. types.
(a) five
(b) two
(c) four
(d) six
Answer:
(b) two

Question 2.
_________ interacts basically with the hardware to generate the desired output.
a) hardware
b) freeware
c) software
d) None of these
Answer:
c) software

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
Which one of the following is not an algorithm?
(a) NTFS
(b) FIFO
(c) SJE
(d) Round Robin
Answer:
(a) NTFS

Question 4.
_________is a software classification.
a) application software
b) system software
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 5.
Which one of the following is not a prominent operating system?
(a) UNIX
(b) IOS
(c) GUI
(d) Android
Answer:
(c) GUI

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 6.
_________is an application software.
a) MS-Word
b) VLC player
c) MS-Excel
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 7.
Which one of the following comes under proprietary license?
(a) Apple Mac OS
(b) Google’s Android
(c) UNIX
(d) LINUX
Answer:
(a) Apple Mac OS

Question 8.
_________is an application software to play audio, video files.
a) MS-Word
b) VLC player
c) MS-Excel
d) All the above
Answer:
b) VLC player

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 9.
………………. is the second most popular mobile operating system globally after Android.
(a) Microsoft Windows
(b) iOS
(c) UNIX
(d) LINUX
Answer:
(b) iOS

Question 10.
_________is a system software.
a) Operating System
b) Language Processor
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 11.
Which one of the following is System software?
(a) Operating System
(b) Language Processor
(c) Both a & b
(d) none of these
Answer:
(c) Both a & b

Question 12.
_________controls input, output of all other peripheral devices.
a) Operating System
b) Language Processor
c) VLC player
d) MS-Word
Answer:
a) Operating System

Question 13.
Hardware and software are managed by ……………….
(a) GUI
(b) OS
(c) Bootstrap
(d) keyboard
Answer:
(b) OS

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 14.
Without a(n) _________, a computer cannot effectively manage all the resources,
a) Operating System
b) Language
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Operating System

Question 15.
An OS that allows only a single user to perform a task at a time is called……………….
(a) Single user os
(b) Single task os
(c) Both a & b
(d) Multi-tasking os
Answer:
(c) Both a & b

Question 16.
A user cannot communicate directly computer _________
a) software
b) hardware
c) Both A and B
c) None of these
Answer:
b) hardware

Question 17.
Identify the multi-user OS?
(a) Windows
(b) Linux
(c) UNIX
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 18.
The mobile devices mostly use _________as mobile OS.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Either A or B
d) None of th
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 19.
GUI stands for ……………….
(a) Geo User Interact
(b) Global User InterChange
(c) Graphical User Interface
(d) Global User Interface
Answer:
(c) Graphical User Interface

Question 20.
Operating System is basically – an interface between the _________
a) user and hardware
b) user and memory
c) programmer and hardware
d) None of these
Answer:
a) user and hardware

Question 21.
The operating system processes are executed by ……………….
(a) User code
(b) System code
(c) Task
(d) Program
Answer:
(b) System code

Question 22.
_________translates the user request into machine language.
a) Operating System
b) Language Processor
c) Application program
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Operating System

Question 23.
NTFS is a ……………….
(a) game
(b) file management technique
(c) OS
(d) System-level security
Answer:
(b) file management technique

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 24.
The main use of Operating 5ystem is _________
a) Controlling Input and Output Devices
b) Manage the utilization of main memory
c) Providing security to user programs
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 25.
Unix was developed in the year ……………….
(a) 1970
(b) 1980
(c) 1990
(d) 1960
Answer:
(a) 1970

Question 26.
A user task is a _________function.
a) printing a document
b) writing a file to disk
c) editing a file or downloading a file
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 27.
………………. is a windows alternative open-source operating system.
(a) React OS
(b) Boss
(c) Redhat
(d) Fedora
Answer:
(a) React OS

Question 28.
______ OS is used in computers and laptops.
a) Multi-user
b) Multitask
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Multi-user

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 29.
Which among the following is not an android mobile open source version?
(a) Donut
(b) Froyo
(c) Nougat
(d) Alpha
Answer:
(a) Donut

Question 30.
In _________OS users can also communicate with each other.
a) Multi-user
b) Multitask
c) Single user
d) MS-DOS
Answer:
a) Multi-user

Question 31.
_____ is an example of a multi-user Operating System.
a) Windows
b) Linux
c) UNIX
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 32.
A cheap computer can be build with _________
a) raspbion OS
b) Raspberry Pi
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 33.
_________is a platform that’s designed to teach how to build a computer.
a) raspbion OS
b) Raspberry Pi
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) raspbion OS

Question 34
______ is a key feature of an OS.
a) User interface
b) Fault tolerance
c) Memory management
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 35.
_________is the only way that a user can make interaction with a computer.
a) User interface
b) Fault tolerance
c) Memory management
d) All the above
Answer:
a) User interface

Question 36.
_________is the main reason for the key success of GUI.
a) User friendly
b) Fault tolerance
c) Robust
d) None of these
Answer:
a) User friendly

Question 37.
GUI means _________
a) Graphical User Interlink
b) Good User Interface
c) Graph User Interface
d) Graphical User Interface
Answer:
d) Graphical User Interface

Question 38.
The _________is a window based system.
a) command mode
b) GUI
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) GUI

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 39.
_________are playing vital role of the particular application.
a) Icons
b) Commands
c) Navigations
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Icons

Question 40.
The___________should satisfy the customer based on their needs.
a) user interface
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) all the above
Answer:
a) user interface

Question 41.
The ________ should save the user’s precious time.
a) user interface
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) all the above
Answer:
a) user interface

Question 42.
The ________is to satisfy the customer.
a) user interface
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) all the above
Answer:
a) user interface

Question 43.
The ________should reduce the number of errors committed by the user.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) None of these
Answer:
d) None of these

Question 44.
_____ is the process of controlling and coordinating the computer’s main memory.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory/ management
d) None of these
Answer:
c) memory/ management

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 45.
________is the process of assigning memory space to various running programs to optimize overall computer performance.
a) user interface
b) memory management
c) fault tolerance
d) all the above
Answer:
b) memory management

Question 46.
________involves the allocation of specific memory blocks to individual programs based on user demands.
a) user interface
b) memory management
c) fault tolerance
d) all the above
Answer:
b) memory management

Question 47.
________ensures the availability of adequate memory for each running program at all times.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) None of these
Answer:
c) memory management

Question 48.
The objective of the Memory Management process is to improve ________
a) the utilization of the CPU
b) the speed of the computer’s response
c) Both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 49.
The Operating System is responsible for the________
a) Keeping track of which portion of memory is currently being used and who is using them.
b) Determining which processes and data to move in and out of memory.
c) Allocation and de-allocation of memory blocks as needed by the program in main memory.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 50.
________ is function that includes creating and deleting processes.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) None of these
Answer:
a) process management

Question 51.
________ providing mechanisms for processes to communicate and synchronize with each other.
a) process management
b) fault tolerance
c) memory management
d) None of these
Answer:
a) process management

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 52.
A(n)____i_____ s the unit of work in a computer.
a) task
b) process
c) operation
d) None of these
Answer:
b) process

Question 53.
A word-processor program being run by an individual user on a computer is a________
a) task
b) process
c) operation
d) None of these
Answer:
b) process

Question 54.
A system task, such as sending output to a printer or screen, can also be called as a ________
a) task
b) process
c) operation
d) none of these
Answer:
b) process

Question 55.
A computer processes are classified as _________ categories.
a) 5
b) 4
c) 3
d) 2
Answer:
d) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 56.
A category of computer process is _________
a) operating system process
b) user process
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) both A and B

Question 57.
________process is executed by system code.
a) operating system process
b) user process
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
a) operating system process

Question 58.
________process is execute by user code.
a) operating system process
b) user process
c) both A and B
d) None of these
Answer:
b) user process

Question 59.
All the computer processes can potentially execute concurrently on a ________CPU,
a) single
b) parallel
c) linear
d) None of these
Answer:
a) single

Question 60.
A process needs certain resources including _________ to finish its task.
a) CPU time
b) Memory
c) Files and I/O devices
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 61.
The Operating System is responsible for the_______activity.
a) Scheduling processes and threads on the CPUs
b) Suspending and resuming processes
c) Providing mechanisms for process synchronization
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 62.
The ________ algorithm is mainly used to allocate the job to the processor.
a) FIFO or SJF
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 63.
FIFO means ________
a) First In Fast Out
b) Fast In First Out
c) First In First Out
d) None of these
Answer:
c) First In First Out

Question 64.
________is based on queuing technique.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) All the above
Answer:
a) FIFO

Question 65.
________algorithm works based on the size of the job being executed by the CPU.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) SJF
Answer:
d) SJF

Question 66.
________algorithm is designed especially for time-sharing systems.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) SJF
Answer:
b) Round Robin

Question 67.
In the _______algorithm jobs are assigned and processor time in a circular method.
a) FIFO
b) Round Robin
c) Based on Priority
d) SJF
Answer:
b) Round Robin

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 68.
The challenge in the computer and software industry is to protect user’s ________from hackers.
a) data
b) operation
c) hardware
d) all the above
Answer:
a) data

Question 69.
The Operating System provides ________levels of securities to the user end.
a) four
b) three
c) two
d) many
Answer:
b) three

Question 70.
The Operating System security is ________
a) File access level
b) System-level
c) Network level
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 71.
In order to access the files created by other people, you should have the ________
a) user name and password
b) ogin id
c) email id
d) access permission
Answer:
d) access permission

Question 72.
File access permissions can be granted by the__________
a) creator of the file
b) administrator of the system
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 73.
________level security is offered by the password in a multi-user environment.
a) File access
b) System
c) Network
d) All the above
Answer:
b) System

Question 74.
________offers the password facility.
a) Windows
b) Linux
c) Windows and Linux
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Windows and Linux

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 75.
________security is an indefinable one.
a) File access level
b) System-level
c) Network level
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Network level

Question 76.
The people from all over the world try to provide ________security.
a) File access level
b) System-level
c) Network level
d) All the above
Answer:
c) Network level

Question 77.
The Operating Systems should be ________
a) patience
b) error-free
c) robust
d) None of these
Answer:
c) robust

Question 78.
When there is a fault, the ________should not crash.
a) application program
b) operating system
c) data
d) None of these
Answer:
b) operating system

Question 79.
The operating system manages the ________on a computer.
a) files
b) folders
c) directory systems
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 80.
Any type of data in a computer is stored in the form of ________
a) blocks
b) files
c) archives
d) None of these
Answer:
b) files

Question 81.
FAT stands for ________
a) File Allocation Task
b) File Authentication Table
c) Fixed Allocation Table
d) File Allocation Table
Answer:
d) File Allocation Table

Question 82.
The FAT stores general information about files like_________
a) filename and type
b) size
c) starting address and access mode
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 83.
______ is the file access mode.
a) sequential
b) indexed / indexed-sequential
c) direct/relative
d) all the above
Answer:
d) all the above

Question 84.
The ________ of the operating system helps to create, edit, copy, allocate memory to the files, and also updates the FAT.
a) system agent
b) file agent
c) file supervisor
d) file manager
Answer:
d) file manager

Question 85.
ext2 stands for _______________
a) secondary extended file system
b) second extended folder system
c) second extended file scheme
d) second extended file system
Answer:
d) second extended file system

Question 86.
ext2 used in_________
a) Linux
b) MSDOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Question 87.
NTFS stands for_______
a) New Technology Focus System
b) New Technology File System
c) New Technology Filter System
d) New Trend File system
Answer:
b) New Technology File System

Question 88.
NTFS developed by________
a) Apple
b) IBM
c) Intel
d) Microsoft
Answer:
d) Microsoft

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 89.
______ has two or more processors for a single running process.
a) Mega processing
b) Micro processing
c) Multi-processing
d) Mixed-processing
Answer:
c) Multi-processing

Question 90.
Processing takes place in parallel is known as __________ processing.
a) parallel processing
b) distributed processing
c) parent
d) None of these
Answer:
a) parallel processing

Question 91.
______feature is used for high-speed execution which increases the power of computing.
a) parallel processing
b) distributed processing
c) multi-processing
d) None of these
Answer:
a) parallel processing

Question 92.
________allows execution of multiple tasks or processes concurrently.
a) Extended processing
b) Time sharing
c) Batch processing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Time sharing

Question 93.
In _______ each task a fixed time is allocated.
a) Extended processing
b) Time sharing
c) Batch processing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Time sharing

Question 94.
In_________the processor switches rapidly between various processes after a time is elapsed or the process is completed.
a) Extended processing
b) Time sharing
c) Batch processing
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Time sharing

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 95.
________feature takes care of the data and application that are stored and processed on multiple physical locations across the world over the digital network.
a) Multi-user OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Question 96.
_________ is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world.
a) Multi-user OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Question 97.
In_________ OS the user can handle the data from different locations.
a) Multiuser OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Question 98.
________is the advantage of distributed Operating System.
a) A user at one location can make use of all the resources available at another location over the network.
b) Many computer resources can be added easily to the network
c) Improves the interaction with the customers and clients.
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 99.
_______reduces the load on the host computer.
a) Multi-user OS
b) Distributed OS
c) Singe user OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Distributed OS

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 100.
Prominent OS is________
a) UNIX and Windows
b) Linux
c) iOS and Android
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 101.
Modem operating systems use a
a) command mode interaction
b) GUI
c) visual
d) None of these
Answer:
b) GUI

Question 102.
OS can be
a) Proprietary with a commercial license
b) Open source
c) Either A or B
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Either A or B

Question 103.
_______is a proprietary with a commercial license OS.
a) Microsoft Windows
b) Apple Mac OS
c) Apple iOS
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 104.
________ is a open source free license OS.
a) Unix
b) Linux
c) Google’s Android
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 105.
Unix derive originally from _______
a) Borland International
b) AT&T Bell Labs
c) Intel
d) None of these
Answer:
b) AT&T Bell Labs

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 106.
The development of the Unix began in the year__________
a) 1960
b) 1966
c) 1970
d) 1976
Answer:
c) 1970

Question 107.
The Unix was developed by _______
a) Ken Thompson
b) Dennis Ritchie
c) Both A and B
d) Bjarne Stroustrup
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 108.
_______ OS can be modified and distributed by anyone around the world.
a) MS-DOS
b) Windows
c) Linux
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Linux

Question 109.
Most of the servers run on Linux because_______
a) it is easy to customize
b) it is rigid
c) it is not case sensitive
d) None of these
Answer:
a) it is easy to customize

Question 110.
_______is Linux distributor.
a) Ubuntu
b) Mint
c) Fedora
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 111.
_______is Linux distributor.
a) RedHat
b) Debian
c) Google’s Android
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 112.
_______is Linux distributor.
a) Chrome OS
b) Chromium OS
c) Both A and B
d) MS-DOS
Answer:
c) Both A and B

Question 113.
The Linux operating system was originated in the year _________
a) 1990
b) 1991
c) 1890
d) 1980
Answer:
d) 1980

Question 114.
The Linux operating system was developed by________
a) Ken Thompson
b) Dennis Ritchie
c) Linus Torvalds
d) Bjarne Stroustrup
Answer:
c) Linus Torvalds

Question 115.
Linux is similar to the________operating system.
a) Windows
b) UNIX
c) MS-DOS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) UNIX

Question 116.
Unix and the C programming language were developed by
a) Borland International
b) AT&T Bell Labs
c) Intel
d) None of these
Answer:
b) AT&T Bell Labs

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 117.
_______OS is primarily targeted to Intel and AMD architecture based computers.
a) Windows
b) UNIX
c) MS-DOS
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Windows

Question 118.
_______is a Windows-alternative open-source operating system.
a) RearOS
b) ReachOS
c) ReactOS
d) None of these
Answer:
c) ReactOS

Question 119.
________is a mobile device.
a) phones
b) tablets
c) MP3 players
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 120.
Android is a mobile operating system developed by
a) Borland International
b) AT&T Bell Labs
c) Intel
d) Google
Answer:
d) Google

Question 121.
_________ OS is designed primarily for touch screens mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets.
a) Windows
b) UNIX
c) MS-DOS
d) Android
Answer:
d) Android

Question 122.
Google has developed _______for televisions.
a) Android Wear
b) Android Car
c) Android TV
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Android TV

Question 123.
Google has developed _______ for cars.
a) Android Auto
b) Android Car
c) Android TV
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android Auto

Question 124.
Google has developed_________for wrist watches.
a) Android Wear
b) Android Car
c) Android TV
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android Wear

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 125.
Google has developed separate Android for_________
a) game consoles
b) digital cameras
c) PCs
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 126.
________ is an Android version.
a) Alpha and Beta
b) Cupcake and Donut
c) Eclair and Froyo
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 127.
_________ is an Android version.
a) Gingerbread
b) Honeycomb
c) Icecream Sandwich
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 128.
___________ is an Android version.
a) Jelly Bean
b) Kitkat and Lollipop
c) Marshmallow and Nought
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

Question 129.
________ is a mobile Operating System created and developed by Apple Inc.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
b) iOS

Question 130.
__________ is a mobile Operating System created and developed only for hardware of the Apple iPhone.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
b) iOS

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 131.
________is the second most popular mobile Operating System globally.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
b) iOS

Question 132.
________ is the top most popular mobile Operating System globally.
a) Android
b) iOS
c) Unix
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android

Question 133.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 1
is the logo of _______OS.
a) Windows 7
b) Windows 8
c) Mac OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Windows 8

Question 134.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 2
is the logo of ______OS
a) Windows 7
b) Windows 8
c) Mac OS
d) None of these
Answer:
c) Mac OS

Question 135.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 3
is the logo of______OS
a) Linux
b) Apple iOS
c) Mac OS
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Linux

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 136.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 4
is the logo of _______OS
a) Windows 7
b) Apple iOS
c) Mac OS
d) None of these
Answer:
b) Apple iOS

Question 137.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 5
is the logo of _______OS
a) Android
b) Apple iOS
c) Mac OS
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Android

Question 138.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 6
is the logo of ______OS
a) Android
b) Apple iOS
c) Mac OS
d) Unix
Answer:
d) Unix

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is an operating system?
Answer:
An operating system is software which serves as the interface between a user and a computer.

Question 2.
What are the classifications of software?
Answer:
Software is classified into two types:

  • Application Software.
  • System Software.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
What is a Real-Time operating system?
Answer:
It is multi-tasking and multi-user operating system designed for real-time-based applications such as robotics, weather, and climate prediction software, etc.

Question 4.
What is system software?
Answer:
The system software is a type of computer program that is designed to run the computer’s hardware and application programs. Example: Operating System.

Question 5.
What are the advantages of Distributed Operating system?
Answer:
Resources can be used in different locations. Improves interaction with customers and clients. Reduces load on host computers. The data can be exchanged via email and chat.

Question 6.
List any 4 system software.
Answer:

  1. Operating System.
  2. Language Processor.
  3. Compiler.
  4. Loader.

Question 7.
Explain Round Robin Scheduling.
Answer:
This type of scheduling is also known as the Time-sharing scheduling process. In this, each program is given a fixed amount of time to execute.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 8.
What are the functions of an operating system?
Answer:
The functions of an Operating System include file management, memory management, process management and device management and many more.

Question 9.
Mention different management techniques?
Answer:
Single continuous allocation, Partitioned allocation, Paged memory management, Segmented memory management.

Question 10.
What are the popular operating systems used in mobile devices?
Answer:
The mobile devices mostly use Android and iOS as mobile OS.

Question 11.
What is an Android?
Answer:
Android is a mobile operating system developed by Google, based on Linux, and designed primarily for touch screens mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets.

Question 12.
How OS cars be developed and released?
Answer:
OS can be either proprietary with a commercial license or can be open source.

Question 13.
What is Process Management?
Answer:
Process management is a function that includes creating and deleting processes and providing mechanisms for processes to communicate and synchronize with each other.

Question 14.
Write note on Microsoft Windows.
Answer:
Microsoft Windows is a family of proprietary operating systems designed by Microsoft Corporation and primarily targeted to Intel and AMD architecture-based computers.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 15.
What are the 3 levels of security?
Answer:

  1. File Access Level
  2. System Level
  3. Network Level.

Question 16.
Write about raspbion OS.
Answer:
Raspbion OS is a platform that’s designed to teach how to build a computer, what every part of a circuit board does, and finally how to code apps or games. The platform is available in pre-designed kits.

Question 17.
Write not on User Interface.
Answer:
User interface is one of the significant features in Operating System. The only way that users can make interact with a computer. If the computer interface is not user-friendly, the user slowly reduces the computer usage from their normal life.

Question 18.
What is the objective of memory management?
Answer:
The objective of the Memory Management process is to improve both the utilization of the CPU and the speed of the computer’s response to its users via main memory.

Question 19.
What is process management?
Answer:
Process management is a function that includes creating and deleting processes and providing mechanisms for processes to communicate and synchronize with each other.

Question 20.
What is the process? Give an example.
Answer:
A process is the unit of work in a computer. A word¬processing program being run by an individual user on a computer is a process.

Question 21.
Give any two examples for a process. Examples:
Answer:
A word-processing program being run by an individual user on a computer.
System task, such as sending output to a printer or screen.

Question 22.
What is the classification of a process?
Answer:
A computer consists of a collection of processes. They are classified as two categories:

  1. Operating System processes are executed by system code.
  2. User Processes which is executed by user code.

Question 23.
What are the requirements of a process?
Answer:
A process needs certain resources including CPU time, memory, files, and I/O devices to finish its task.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 24.
What is the major challenge in the computer and software industry?
Answer:
The major challenge in the computer and software industry is to protect user’s legitimate data from hackers.

Question 25.
Explain File Access level security.
Answer:
In order to access the files created by other people, you should have access permission. Permissions can either be granted by the creator of the file or by the administrator of the system.

Question 26.
How will you offer system-level security?
Answer:
System-level security is offered by the password in a multi-user environment.

Question 27.
Which OS offers system-level security?
Answer:
Both Windows and Linux offer the password facility to enable system-level security.

Question 28.
Write a note on network-level security.
Answer:
Network security is an indefinable one. So people from all over the world try to provide such security.

Question 29.
Write a note on Fault Tolerance.
Answer:
Fault Tolerance: The Operating Systems should be robust. When there is a fault, the Operating System should not crash, instead, the Operating System has fault tolerance capabilities and retains the existing state of the system.

Question 30.
How data is stored in a computer?
Answer:
Any type of data in a computer is stored in the form of files and directories/folders through File Allocation Table (FAT).

Question 31.
What will be stored in FAT?
Answer:
The FAT stores general information about files like filename, type (text or binary), size, starting address, and access mode.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 32.
What are the various file access modes?
Answer:
File access modes are:

  • Sequential.
  • Indexed.
  • Indexed-sequential.
  • Direct.
  • Relative.

Question 33.
Write note on file manager.
Answer:
The file manager of the operating system helps to create, edit, copy, allocate memory to the files and also updates the FAT,

Question 34.
What is multi-process?
Answer:
This is one of the features of Operating System, It has two or more processors for a single running process. Each processor works on different parts of the same task or on two or more different tasks. This feature is used for high-speed execution which increases the power of computing.

Question 35.
Write note on parallel processing.
Answer:
Processing takes place in parallel is known as parallel processing.

Question 36.
Write a note on Time Sharing,
Answer:
It allows the execution of multiple tasks or processes concurrently. For each task, a fixed time is allocated. This division of time is called Time- sharing.

Question 37.
Why distributed operating system is used?
Answer:
The Distributed Operating System is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 38.
What are the advantages of GUI?
Answer:
A GUI lets you use your mouse to click icons, buttons, menus, and everything is clearly displayed on the screen using a combination of graphics and text elements.

Question 39.
What are the key features of OS?
Answer:
Features of the Operating System:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 7

Question 40.
What devices are controlled by OS?
Answer:
OS controls input, output and other peripheral devices such as disk drives, printers and electronic gadgets

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Part III

Explain in Brief

Question 1.
Write a short note on Android.
Answer:
Android:
Android is a mobile operating system developed by Google, based on Linux, and designed primarily for touch screens mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets. Google has further developed Android TV for televisions, Android Auto for cars, and Android Wear for wrist watches, each with a specialized user interface. Variants of Android are also used on game consoles, digital cameras, PCs, and other electronic gadgets.

Question 2.
List various OS with their symbol.
Answer:
Various Operating Systems:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 8

Question 3.
Explain the classification of Operating Systems according to availability.
Answer:
Classification of Operating Systems according to availability.
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 9

Question 4.
Write a note on iOS – iPhone OS.
Answer:
iOS (formerly iPhone OS) is a mobile Operating System created and developed by Apple Inc., exclusively for its hardware. It is the Operating System that presently powers many of the company’s mobile devices, including the iPhone, iPad, and iPod Touch. It is the second most popular mobile Operating System globally after Android.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 5.
List the various Linux distributions.
Answer:
Linux Distributions:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 10

Question 6.
Write a note on single-user OS?
Answer:
An os allows only a single user to perform a task at a time. It is called a single user and single task os.
Example: MS-DOS.

Question 7.
Explain Android OS.
Answer:
Android is a mobile operating system developed by Google, based on Linux and designed primarily for touch screen mobile devices such as smartphones and tablets.

Google has further developed Android TV for televisions, Android Auto for cars and Android Wear for wrist watches, each with a specialized user interface.

Variants of Android are also used on game consoles, digital cameras, PCs and other electronic gadgets.

Question 8.
What are the various Android versions?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 11

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 9.
Define Process?
Answer:

  1. A process is a unit of work (program) in a computer.
  2. A word processing program being run by an individual user on a computer is a process.
  3. A system task, such as sending output to a printer or screen can also be called a process.

Question 10.
What are the points are considered when User Interface is designed for an application.
Answer:
The following points are considered when User
The interface is designed for an application.

  • The user interface should enable the user to retain this expertise for a longer time.
  • The user interface should also satisfy the customer based on their needs.
  • The user interface should save user’s precious time. Create graphical elements like Menus,Window,Tabs, Icons and reduce typing work will be an added advantage of the Operating System.
  • The ultimate aim of any product is to satisfy the customer. The User Interface is also to satisfy the customer.
  • The user interface should reduce number of errors committed by the user with a little practice the user should be in a position to avoid errors.

Question 11.
Name the activities done by os related to the process management?
Answer:

  1. Scheduling processes and threads on the CPU.
  2. Creating and deleting both user and system processes.
  3. Suspending and resuming processes.
  4. Providing mechanisms for process synchronization.
  5. Providing mechanisms for process communication.

Question 12.
What are the responsibilities of the Operating System in connection with memory management?
Answer:
The Operating System is responsible for the following activities in connection with memory management:

  • Keeping track of which portion of memory are currently being used and who is using them.
  • Determining which processes and data to move in and out of memory.
  • Allocation and de-allocation of memory blocks as needed by the program in main memory.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 13.
Write a note on the File Allocations Table (FAT).
Answer:

  1. Any type of data in a computer is stored in the form of flies and directories/folders through File Allocation Table (FAT).
  2. The FAT stores general information about files like file name, type (text or binary), size, starting address and access mode (sequential / indexed / indexed – sequential / direct / relative).

Question 14.
Explain File Management.
Answer:
File Management:
File management is an important function of OS which handles the data storage techniques. The operating system manages the files, folders, and directory systems on a computer.

Any type of data in a computer is stored in the form of files and directories/folders through File Allocation Table (FAT). The FAT stores general information about files like filename, type (text or binary), size, starting address and access mode (sequential/indexed/indexed-sequential/direct/ relative).

The file manager of the operating system helps to create, edit, copy, allocate memory to the files, and also updates the FAT. The OS also takes care of the files that are opened with proper access rights to read or edit them.

There are few other file management techniques available like Next-Generation File System (NTFS) and ext2 (Linux).

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 15.
Write a note on React OS.
React os is a window – alternative open-source os which is being developed on the principles of windows – without using any of the Microsoft code.

PART – IV

Explain in detail.

Question 1.
What is the Need for Operating System? Explain in detail.
Answer:
Operating System has become essential to enable the users to design applications without the knowledge of the computer’s internal structure of hardware. Operating System manages all the Software and Hardware.

Most of the time there are many different computer programmes running at the same time, they all need to access the Computers, CPU, Memory, and Storage. The need for an Operating System is basically – an interface between the user and hardware.

Interaction of Operating system and user
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 12

Operating System works as translator, while it translates the user request into machine language (Binary language), processes it and then sends it back to Operating System. Operating System converts processed information into the user-readable form.

Question 2.
What are the uses of the Operating System?
Answer:
The main use of the Operating System is:

  • To ensure that a computer can be used to extract what the user wants it to do.
  • Easy interaction between the users and computers.
  • Starting computer operation automatically when power is turned on (Booting).
  • Controlling Input and Output Devices.
  • Manage the utilization of main memory.
  • Providing security to user programs.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Question 3.
Explain User Interface?
Answer:
User Interface:
The user interface is one of the significant features of the Operating System. The only way that a user can make interacting with a computer. If the computer interface is not user-friendly, the user slowly reduces the computer usage from their normal life. This is the main reason for the key success of GUI (Graphical User Interface) based Operating System. The GUI is a window-based system with a pointing device to direct I/O, choose from menus, make selections, and a keyboard to enter text. Its vibrant colours attract the user very easily. Beginners are impressed by the help and pop-up window message boxes. Icons are playing a vital role in the particular application.

Now Linux distribution is also available as a GUI-based Operating System. The following points are considered when User Interface is designed for an application.

  1. The user interface should enable the user to retain this expertise for a longer time.
  2. The user interface should also satisfy the customer based on their needs.
  3. The user interface should save the user’s precious time. Create graphical elements like Menus, Window, Tabs, Icons and reduce typing work will be an added advantage of the Operating System.
  4. The ultimate aim of any product is to satisfy the customer. The User Interface is also designed to satisfy the customer.
  5. The user interface should reduce the number of errors committed by the user with a little practice the user should be in a position to avoid errors (Error Log File)

Question 4.
Explain distributed operating system.
Answer:
This feature takes care of the data and applications that are stored and processed on multiple physical locations across the world over the digital network. The Distributed Operating System is used to access shared data and files that reside in any machine around the world. The user can handle the data from different locations. The users can access as if it is available on their own computer.

The advantages of distributed Operating System are as follows:

  • A user at one location can make use of all the resources available at another location over the network.
  • Many computer resources can be added easily to the network.
  • Improves the interaction with the customers and clients.
  • Reduces the load on the host computer.

Question 5.
Explain process Management.
Answer:
Process Management:
Process management is a function that includes creating and deleting processes and providing mechanisms for processes to communicate and synchronize with each other. A process is a unit of work (program) in a computer. A word processing program being run by an individual user on a computer is a process. A system task, such as sending output to a printer or screen, can also be called a Process.

A computer consists of a collection of processes, they are classified into two categories:

  1. Operating System processes which is executed by system code.
  2. User Processes which is executed by user code.

All these processes can potentially execute concurrently on a single CPU. A process needs certain resources including CPU time, memory, files, and I/O devices to finish its task.

The Operating System is responsible for the following activities associated with the process management:

  1. Scheduling processes and threads on the CPUs.
  2. Creating and deleting both user and system processes.
  3. Suspending and resuming processes.
  4. Providing mechanisms for process synchronization.
  5. Providing mechanisms for process communication.

The following algorithms are mainly used to allocate the job (process) to the processor.

  1. FIFO
  2. SJF
  3. Round Robin
  4. Based on Priority

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

ACTIVITY

Question 1.
Draw a line between the operating system logo and the correct description.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System 13

Question 2.
Discuss and provide suitable answers to the questions below.
Answer:
One of the functions of an Operating System is multi-tasking.
i) Explain one reason why multi-tasking is needed in an operating system.
Reasons:

  • CPU is used most of the time and never becomes idle.
  • The system looks fast as all the tasks run in parallel.
  • Short-time jobs are completed faster than long-time jobs.
  • Resources are used nicely.
  • Total read time is taken to execute program/job decreases.
  • Response time is shorter.

ii) State two other functions of an Operating System.
Disk Management:
The operating system manages the disk space. It manages the stored files and folders in a proper way.

Device Controlling:
The operating system also controls all devices attached to the computer. The hardware devices are controlled with the help of small software called a device driver.

Samacheer Kalvi 11th Computer Science Guide Chapter 4 Theoretical Concepts of Operating System

Print controlling:
The operating system also controls the printing function. If a user issues two print commands at a time, it does not mix data of these files and prints them separately.